Lucent Technologies Window SLV 9124 User Manual
FrameSaverr SLV 9124  
User's Guide  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copyright E 2000 Paradyne Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
Reprinted under license agreement with Paradyne Corporation.  
Printed in U.S.A.  
Trademarks  
ACCULINK, COMSPHERE, FrameSaver, Hotwire, and NextEDGE are registered trademarks of Paradyne  
Corporation, and MVL, OpenLane, Performance Wizard, and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation, and  
are used by Lucent Technologies, Inc. pursuant to a license agreement granted by Paradyne Corporation. All other  
products and services mentioned are the trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service  
marks of their respective owners.  
Patent Notification  
FrameSaver products are protected by U.S. Patents: 5,550,700 and 5,654,966. Other patents are pending.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
About This Guide  
H
H
H
H
Purpose and Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii  
Product-Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
1
2
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124  
H
SLM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
H
User Interface and Basic Operation  
H
H
H
H
Logging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Screen Work Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Navigating the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Selecting from a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Switching Between Screen Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Selecting a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
3
Configuration  
H
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Configuration Option Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Changing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Saving Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Setting Up for Trap Dial-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
H
H
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
H
H
Setting Up Auto-Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Automatically Removing a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Setting Up Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site . . . . . . . 3-15  
Setting Up Back-to-Back Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Changing Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Configuration Option Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Configuring the Overall System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
Configuring Service Level Verification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Configuring General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
Configuring the Physical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Configuring the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Configuring the User Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28  
Configuring the DSX-1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30  
Assigning Time Slots/Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32  
Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface . . . . . . . 3-32  
Assigning DSX-1 Time Slots to the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34  
Clearing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39  
Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43  
Configuring PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46  
Setting Up Management and Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48  
Configuring Node IP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48  
Configuring Management PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51  
Configuring General SNMP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54  
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55  
Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58  
Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59  
Configuring the Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63  
Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem . . . . . . . . 3-67  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
Security and Logins  
H
H
H
H
Limiting Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Controlling External COM Port Device Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Limiting Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Limiting FTP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link . . . . . 4-7  
Controlling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Disabling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Creating a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Modifying a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Deleting a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
H
H
H
H
5
Operation and Maintenance  
H
Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
H
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Control Lead Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Device Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
System and Test Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19  
PVC Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21  
Time Slot Assignment Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23  
Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25  
Clearing Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26  
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27  
DLCI Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29  
Frame Relay Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31  
ESF Line Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34  
FTP File Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37  
Upgrading System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39  
Determining Whether a Download Is Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40  
Changing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40  
Transferring Collected Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41  
H
H
H
H
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6
Troubleshooting  
H
H
Problem Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface . . . 6-6  
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Troubleshooting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Frame Relay PVC Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15  
Tests Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
Test Timeout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
Starting and Stopping a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
Aborting All Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18  
PVC Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19  
PVC Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20  
Send Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20  
Monitor Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21  
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21  
Physical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23  
Payload Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24  
Repeater Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
DTE Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Send Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27  
Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28  
Send Remote Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29  
Send and Monitor Pattern Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30  
IP Ping Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31  
Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
7
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices  
H
H
H
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
H
H
Before Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Configuring NetScout Manager Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager  
Plus Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Verifying Domains and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Correcting Domains and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Editing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Adding SLV Alarms Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Creating History Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Installing the User-Defined History Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Statistical Windows Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
H
H
H
9
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
H
H
H
H
H
Installation and Setup of Network Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Discovering FrameSaver Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Configuring the Discovered Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Grouping Elements for Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Generating Reports for a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
About Service Level Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
About At-a-Glance Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
About Trend Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Printed Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Reports Applicable to SLV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
H
A Menu Hierarchy  
H
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
B SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
H
H
H
MIB Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
System Group (mib-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Interfaces Group (mib-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
H
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
H
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Trap: warmStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Trap: authenticationFailure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Traps: linkUp and linkDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Traps: enterprise-Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11  
Traps: RMON-Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14  
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15  
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16  
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20  
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22  
H
H
C Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
H
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
H
COM Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
LAN Adapter Converter and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Standard EIA-232-D Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Port 1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6  
Standard V.35 Straight-through Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7  
Standard V.35 Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7  
T1 Network Cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8  
Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-510) . . . . . C-8  
DSX-1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9  
DSX-1 Adapter (Feature No. 9008-F1-560) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9  
H
H
H
D Technical Specifications  
E Equipment List  
H
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2  
H
Index  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Guide  
Purpose and Intended Audience  
This document contains information that applies to the Model 9124 FrameSaver  
Service Level Verifier (SLV) unit. It is intended for system designers, engineers,  
administrators, and operators.  
You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications  
equipment and frame relay networks.  
Document Organization  
Section  
Description  
Chapter 1  
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124. Identifies how the  
FrameSaver 9124 unit fits into a Service Level  
Management (SLM) solution, and describes the unit’s  
features.  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 4  
Chapter 5  
User Interface and Basic Operation. Shows how to  
navigate the user interface.  
Configuration. Provides configuration information for the  
FrameSaver 9124.  
Security and Logins. Provides procedures for controlling  
access to the FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins.  
Operation and Maintenance. Provides procedures to  
display unit identification information and perform file  
transfers, as well as how to display and interpret status  
and statistical information.  
Chapter 6  
Troubleshooting. Provides device problem resolution,  
alarm, and other information, as well as troubleshooting  
and test procedures.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
Section  
Description  
Chapter 7  
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices. Identifies  
where installation and setup information is located and how  
FrameSaver units are supported.  
Chapter 8  
Chapter 9  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver  
Devices. Describes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus  
application so it supports FrameSaver units.  
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices.  
Describes setup of Concord’s Network Health application  
so reports can be created for FrameSaver units, and  
identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units.  
Appendix A  
Appendix B  
Menu Hierarchy. Contains a graphical representation of  
how the user interface screens are organized.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults.  
Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be  
downloaded, describes the unit’s compliance with SNMP  
format standards and with its special operational trap  
features, and describes the RMON-specific user history  
groups, and alarm and event defaults.  
Appendix C  
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments. Shows the  
rear panel, tells what cables are needed, and provides pin  
assignments for interfaces and cables.  
Appendix D  
Appendix E  
Index  
Technical Specifications.  
Equipment List.  
Lists key terms, acronyms, concepts, and sections.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
Product-Related Documents  
Document Number  
Document Title  
FrameSaver SLV Documentation:  
9124-A2-LN10  
9124-A2-LL10  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 Installation Instructions  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 Quick Reference  
Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation:  
7800-A2-GZ41  
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for UNIX  
Quick Start Installation Instructions  
7800-A2-GZ42  
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for  
Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions  
NetScout Documentation:  
2930-170  
NetScout Probe User Guide  
2930-610  
NetScout Manager/Plus User Guide  
2930-620  
NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server  
Administrator Guide  
2930-788  
NetScout Manager Plus Set Up & Installation Guide  
Concord Communications Documentation:  
09-10010-005  
09-10020-005  
09-10050-002  
09-10070-001  
Network Health User Guide  
Network Health Installation Guide  
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide  
Network Health Reports Guide  
Contact your sales or service representative to order product documentation.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
Conventions Used  
Convention Used  
When Used  
Italic  
To indicate variable information (e.g.,  
DLCI nnnn).  
Menu selection sequence  
To provide an abbreviated method for indicating  
the selections to be made from a menu or  
selections from within a menu before  
performing a procedural step.  
For example,  
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status  
indicates that you should select Status from the  
Main Menu, then select System and Test Status  
from the Status menu).  
(Path:)  
To provide a checkpoint that coincides with the  
menu path shown at the top of the screen.  
Always shown within parentheses so you can  
verify that you are referencing the correct table  
(e.g., Path: main/config/alarm).  
Brackets [ ]  
To indicate multiple selection choices when  
multiple options can be displayed (e.g., Clear  
[Network/Port-1] Statistics).  
Text highlighted in red  
To indicate a hyperlink to additional information  
when viewing this manual online. Click on the  
highlighted text.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124  
1
This chapter includes the following:  
H
H
SLM Overview  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 Features  
SLM Overview  
The Service Level Management (SLM) Solution consists of:  
H
H
H
H
FrameSaverr SLV units  
OpenLaner SLM system  
NetScout Manager Plus application  
Standalone NetScout Probes, if needed  
This solution provides increased manageability, monitoring, and diagnostics so  
customers can identify problems more efficiently, troubleshoot those problems  
faster, and maximize their network to control costs. It is also compatible with  
Concord Communication’s Network Health software.  
FrameSaver SLV (Service Level Verifier) 9124 units operate with other  
FrameSaver devices, and when teamed with multinationally based FrameSaver  
devices in multinational applications, provides a complete global frame relay  
management solution.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 Features  
The FrameSaver SLV 9124 unit provides the following features:  
H
Intelligent Service Level Verification. Provides accurate throughput,  
latency, and availability measurements to determine network performance  
and whether service level agreements (SLAs) are being met, along with SLA  
reporting. SLA parameter thresholds can be configured to provide proactive  
notification of a developing network problem.  
H
H
Security. Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access  
to the unit.  
TruePutt Technology. Using Frame Delivery Ratios (FDR) and Data  
Delivery Ratios (DDR), throughput (within and above CIR, as well as between  
CIR and EIR, and above EIR) can be measured precisely, eliminating  
inaccuracies due to averaging. These ratios are available through OpenLane  
SLV reports.  
H
Frame Relay Aware Management. Supports diagnostic and network  
management features over the frame relay network using the Annex-A,  
Annex-D, and Standard UNI (User Network Interface) LMI management  
protocol. The unit’s frame relay capability also supports:  
— Inband management channels over the frame relay network using  
dedicated PVCs.  
— Unique nondisruptive diagnostics.  
— CIR monitoring on a PVC basis.  
— Multiple PVCs on an interface.  
— Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs.  
— Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single  
network PVC.  
H
Auto-Configuration. Provides the following automatic configuration features:  
— Frame Relay Discovery – For automatic discovery of network DLCIs and  
configuration of a user data port DLCI, the PVC connection, and a  
management PVC, which is multiplexed with user data DLCIs.  
— LMI Protocol Discovery – For automatic configuration of the protocol  
being used by the network.  
— DLCI Deletion – For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCIs  
from the unit’s configuration and statistical databases.  
— CIR Determination – For automatic recalculation of the committed rate  
measurement interval (Tc) and excess burst size (Be) when a DLCI’s CIR  
changes.  
Excess burst size (Be) and committed burst size (Bc) are recalculated  
when Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits) is set to CIR. The committed rate  
measurement interval (Tc) is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc  
(Bits) is set to Other.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124  
H
RMON-Based User History Statistics Gathering. Provides everything  
needed to monitor network service levels, plus throughput with accurate data  
delivery, network latency, and LMI and PVC availability.  
In addition, port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links. These  
statistics are available real-time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an  
RMON2 User History object. In future releases of the OpenLane SLM  
system, this will enable even more accurate calculations of utilization.  
H
H
Network User History Synchronization. Allows correlation of RMON2 User  
History statistics among all SLV devices in a network for more accurate  
OpenLane SLV reports. Using a central clock, called the network reference  
time, all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the  
network, further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports.  
Extensive Testing Capability. Provides a variety of tests to identify  
and diagnose device, network, and other problems. These tests can be  
commanded from the unit’s menu-driven user interface or the OpenLane  
system (using its easy-to-use Diagnostic Troubleshooting feature).  
These tests include V.54 or FT1-ANSI data channel loopback support so the  
frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its  
own switch without having to contact the leased line provider for loopback  
activation.  
H
H
Dedicated Troubleshooting PVC. Provides a troubleshooting management  
link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network. This  
feature can be configured.  
LMI Packet Capture. Provides a way to upload data that has been captured  
in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network  
Associates Sniffer for analysis, or viewed via the menu-driven user interface.  
The 12 most recent LMI messages can be displayed from the menu-driven  
user interface.  
H
Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported.  
Central Site  
FrameSaver  
SLV 9124*  
Remote Site  
FrameSaver  
SLV 9124  
Feature  
Through Connections (PVCs)  
Dedicated Management PVCs  
* Model for Japan only.  
120  
2
64  
2
H
H
Router-Independence. Unique diagnostics, performance monitoring,  
PVC-based in-band network management, and SNMP connectivity is not  
dependent upon external routers, cables, or LAN adapters.  
Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support. Provides Inverse ARP (Address  
Resolution Protocol) support so the frame relay router at one end of a  
management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the  
other end of the PVC. Standard RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows the  
router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to  
that FrameSaver unit.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124  
H
Configuration Upload/Download and Software Download Capability.  
Provides quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes and  
software downloads while the unit is running using the standard File Transfer  
Protocol (FTP). Two software images can be stored.  
H
H
Dual Flash Memory. Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and  
running. Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user’s  
discretion.  
ATM VPI/VCI and DLCI Correlation. For networks with both ATM and frame  
relay-access endpoints, allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating  
Virtual Path or Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) in the far-end ATM-access  
endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for  
OpenLane SLV reports.  
H
H
Back-to-Back Operation. Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected  
via a leased-line network or simulation so a point-to-point configuration can  
be implemented.  
OpenLane Service Level Management Solution. Provides an  
advanced, standards-based performance monitoring and management  
application.  
Being standards-based, the OpenLane SLM system can also be used with  
other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM’s NetView.  
OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane  
features with the OpenView Web interface.  
Being Web-based, the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data  
contained in the database to provide anytime, anywhere access to this  
information via a Web browser.  
Some of the OpenLane SLM system’s features include:  
— Real-time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement  
details (not averages, which can skew performance results) of service  
level agreement (SLA) parameters.  
— Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical  
reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified.  
— Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy-to-use tool for performing  
tests, which include end-to-end, PVC loopback, connectivity, and physical  
interface tests.  
— Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices, and set  
RMON alarms and thresholds. Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be  
assigned.  
— Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with  
their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered  
automatically, along with their PVCs.  
— A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system.  
— Firmware downloading provides an easy-to-use tool for downloading to  
an entire network or a portion of the network.  
— On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices, and SNMP polling and  
reporting are available.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124  
H
NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probe Support. Provides complete  
LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for FrameSaver SLV  
devices. The following features are supported using this application:  
— Thresholds for RMON 1 (Remote Monitoring, Version 1) alarms and  
events can be configured.  
— Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2  
(Version 2) data. NetScout Manager Plus’s Protocol Directory and  
Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver devices to measure up to  
eleven network-layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated  
by each. Its IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices  
using network bandwidth for traffic and protocol analysis, identifying the  
network’s top six users. In addition, it collects performance statistics from  
FrameSaver devices. Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15-minute  
buckets, with 96 buckets in a 24-hour period, for up to five days worth of  
data.  
— Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver  
devices at sites where full 7-layer monitoring, an unlimited number of  
protocols, and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are  
desired.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the FrameSaver SLV 9124  
This page intentionally left blank.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Interface and  
Basic Operation  
2
This chapter tells you how to access, use, and navigate the menu-driven user  
interface. It includes the following:  
H
H
H
H
Logging On  
Main Menu  
Screen Work Areas  
Navigating the Screens  
— Keyboard Keys  
— Function Keys  
— Selecting from a Menu  
— Switching Between Screen Areas  
— Selecting a Field  
— Entering Information  
What appears on the screens depends on:  
H
H
Current configuration – How your network is currently configured.  
Security access level – The security level set by the system administrator  
for each user.  
H
Data selection criteria – What you entered in previous screens.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Logging On  
Start a session using one of the following methods:  
H
Telnet session via:  
— An in-band management channel through the frame relay network.  
— A local in-band management channel configured on the DTE port  
between the FrameSaver unit and the router.  
H
H
Dial-in connection using the internal modem.  
Direct terminal connection over the COM port.  
When logging on, the User Interface Idle screen appears.  
H
H
If no security was set up or security was disabled, the Main Menu screen  
appears (see page 2-4). You can begin your session.  
If security was set up and is enabled, you are prompted for a login. Enter  
your login ID and password.  
When the user interface has been idle, a session is automatically ended and the  
screen goes blank when the unit times out. Press Enter to reactivate the  
interface.  
" Procedure  
To log in when security is being enforced:  
1. Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter.  
2. Type your Password and press Enter.  
— Valid characters – All printable ASCII characters  
— Number of characters – Up to 10 characters can be entered in the  
Login ID and Password fields  
— Case-sensitive – Yes  
An asterisk (*) appears in the password field for each character entered.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
If your login was . . .  
Then the . . .  
Valid  
Main Menu appears (see page 2-4). Begin your session.  
Invalid  
Message, Invalid Password, appears on line 24, and  
the Login screen is redisplayed.  
After three unsuccessful attempts:  
– A Telnet session is closed.  
– The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly  
connected terminal.  
– An SNMP trap is generated.  
Access is denied.  
See your system administrator to verify your login (Login  
ID/Password combination).  
If two sessions are already active, wait and try again.  
H
H
If attempting to access the unit through Telnet, the local Telnet client process  
returns a Connection refused:message at the bottom of the screen.  
If attempting to access the unit over the COM port or modem port, not via  
Telnet, the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed.  
The type of connection (Telnet Connection, Direct COM Port Connection, or  
Direct Modem Port Connection) for each current user is identified, along with  
the user’s login ID.  
" Procedure  
To end the session:  
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function keys area of the screen.  
2. Type e (Exit) and press Enter.  
— For a COM port-connected terminal, the session is ended.  
— For a modem port-connected terminal, the session is ended and the  
modem is disconnected.  
— For a Telnet connection, the session is closed and, if no other Telnet or  
FTP session is occurring over the connection, the modem is  
disconnected.  
If ending a session from the Configuration branch, see Saving Configuration  
Options in Chapter 3, Configuration.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Main Menu  
Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit’s tasks begins at the Main Menu, which has  
five menus or branches. The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears  
when security has been set up.  
main  
Access Level: 1  
MAIN MENU  
9124-II  
04/26/1999 23:32  
Device Name: Node A  
Slot: 1 Type: T1 FR NAM  
Status  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions Exit  
Select . . .  
To . . .  
Status  
View diagnostic tests, interfaces, PVC connections, and  
statistics. You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit  
identity information.  
Test  
Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit’s interfaces.  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Display and edit the configuration options.  
Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a  
selected application. You can also automatically populate  
network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric  
settings.  
Control  
Control the menu-driven user interface for call directories,  
device naming, login administration, and selecting software  
releases. You can also initiate a power-on reset of the  
FrameSaver unit.  
See Appendix A, Menu Hierarchy, for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy,  
which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit’s menus and screens.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Screen Work Areas  
There are two user work areas:  
H
H
Screen area – Where you input information into fields.  
Function keys area – Where you perform specific screen functions.  
Below is a sample configuration screen.  
Model Number  
Date and Time  
Menu Path  
main/config/system/slv..  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
01/26/1999 23:32  
Device  
Name  
SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS  
SLV Sample Interval (secs):  
SLV Delivery Ratio:  
60  
Disable  
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout:  
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold:  
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold: 1  
Enable  
3
Screen  
Area  
SLV Packet Size (bytes):  
SLV Synchronization Role:  
64  
Tributary  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Save  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Function  
Keys Area  
Message Area  
Screen Format  
Description  
Menu Path  
Menu selections made to reach the current screen.  
Device Name  
Customer-assigned identification of the FrameSaver  
unit.  
9124-II  
FrameSaver unit’s model number.  
Screen Area  
Selection, display, and input fields for monitoring and  
maintaining the FrameSaver unit.  
Function Keys Area  
Message Area  
Specific functions that can be performed by pressing  
a specified key, then pressing Enter.  
System-related information and valid settings for  
input fields in the lower left corner.  
System and Test Status messages in the lower right  
corner.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Navigating the Screens  
You can navigate the screens by:  
H
H
Using keyboard keys.  
Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys.  
Keyboard Keys  
Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area:  
Press . . .  
To . . .  
Ctrl-a  
Move cursor between the screen area and the  
screen function keys area.  
Esc  
Return to the previous screen.  
Right Arrow (on same screen row), or Move cursor to the next field.  
Tab (on any screen row)  
Left Arrow (on same screen row), or  
Ctrl-k  
Move cursor to the previous field.  
Backspace  
Move cursor one position to the left or to the  
last character of the previous field.  
Spacebar  
Select the next valid value for the field.  
Delete character that the cursor is on.  
Delete (Del)  
Up Arrow or Ctrl-u  
Move cursor up one field within a column on the  
same screen.  
Down Arrow or Ctrl-d  
Right Arrow or Ctrl-f  
Left Arrow or Ctrl-b  
Ctrl-l  
Move cursor down one field within a column on  
the same screen.  
Move cursor one character to the right if in edit  
mode.  
Move cursor one character to the left if in edit  
mode.  
Redraw the screen display, clearing information  
typed in but not yet entered.  
Enter (Return)  
Accept entry or, when pressed before entering  
data or after entering invalid data, display valid  
options on the last row of the screen.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Function Keys  
All function keys (located in the lower part of the screen; see the example on  
page 2-5) operate the same way throughout the screens. They are not  
case-sensitive, so upper- or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably.  
These keys use the following conventions:  
For the screen  
Select . . .  
M or m  
E or e  
N or n  
O or o  
L or l  
And press Enter to . . .  
function . . .  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Return to the Main Menu screen.  
Terminate the menu-driven user interface session.  
Enter new data.  
New  
Modify  
Modify existing data.  
Delete  
Save  
Delete data.  
S or s  
R or r  
Save information.  
Refresh  
ClrStats  
Update screen with current information.  
C or c  
Clear network performance statistics and refresh the  
screen.  
Variations include:  
H ClrSLV&DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI  
statistics.  
H ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics.  
Display the previous page.  
U or u  
D or d  
PgUp  
PgDn  
Display the next page.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Selecting from a Menu  
" Procedure  
To select from a menu:  
1. Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection,  
or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list.  
Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor  
from position to position.  
2. Press Enter. The selected menu or screen appears.  
" Procedure  
To return to a previous screen, press the Escape (Esc) key until you reach the  
desired screen.  
Switching Between Screen Areas  
Use Ctrl-a to switch between screen areas (see the example on page 2-5).  
" Procedure  
To switch to the function keys area:  
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area.  
2. Select either the function’s designated (underlined) character or  
Tab to the desired function key.  
3. Press Enter. The function is performed.  
To return to the screen area, press Ctrl-a again.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
Selecting a Field  
Once you reach the desired menu or screen, select a field to view or change, or  
issue a command.  
Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another. The  
current setting or value appears to the right of the field.  
Entering Information  
You can enter information in one of three ways. Select the field, then:  
H
Manually type in (enter) the field value or command.  
Example:  
Entering bjk as a user’s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen (from the  
Control menu/branch).  
H
H
Type in (enter) the first letter(s) of a field value or command, using the unit’s  
character-matching feature.  
Example:  
When configuring a port’s physical characteristics with the Port (DTE)  
Initiated Loopbacks configuration option/field selected (possible settings  
include Disable, Local, DTPLB, DCLB, and Both), entering d or D displays  
the first value starting with d – Disable. In this example, entering dt or DT  
would display DTPLB as the selection.  
Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated  
function key.  
Example:  
To save a configuration option change, select Save. S or s is the designated  
function key.  
If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections, press the  
spacebar; the first valid setting for the field appears. Continue pressing the  
spacebar to scroll through other possible settings.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Interface and Basic Operation  
This page intentionally left blank.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3
This chapter includes the following:  
H
Basic Configuration  
— Configuration Option Areas  
— Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options  
— Changing Configuration Options  
— Saving Configuration Options  
— Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units  
Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock  
Setting Up for Trap Dial-Out  
H
H
— Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial-Out  
— Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out  
Setting Up Auto-Configuration  
H
H
— Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode  
— Automatically Removing a Circuit  
Setting Up Management  
— Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site  
— Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP  
— Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site  
Setting Up Back-to-Back Operation  
H
H
— Changing Operating Mode  
Configuration Option Tables  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
H
H
H
Configuring the Overall System  
— Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System  
— Configuring Service Level Verification Options  
— Configuring General System Options  
Configuring the Physical Interfaces  
— Configuring the Network Interface  
— Configuring the User Data Port  
— Configuring the DSX-1 Interface  
Assigning Time Slots/Cross Connections  
— Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface  
— Assigning DSX-1 Time Slots to the Network Interface  
— Clearing Assignments  
H
H
H
H
Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records  
Configuring PVC Connections  
Setting Up Management and Communication Options  
— Configuring Node IP Information  
— Configuring Management PVCs  
— Configuring General SNMP Management  
— Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support  
— Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options  
— Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out  
— Configuring the Communication Port  
— Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Basic Configuration  
Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates. Use  
the FrameSaver unit’s Configuration Edit/Display menu to display or change  
configuration option settings.  
The Configuration Edit/Display menu of the FrameSaver 9124 is shown below.  
Configuration Menu  
main/config  
9124-II  
Device Name: Node A  
5/26/1999 23:32  
CONFIGURATION EDIT/DISPLAY  
System  
Network  
DSX-1  
Data Ports  
Time Slot Assignment  
PVC Connections  
Management and Communication  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Save  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Changing an Auto-Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit’s  
configuration. See Setting Up Auto-Configuration for additional information.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuration Option Areas  
The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings, which are  
located in the Factory Default Configuration option area. You can find the default  
settings for configuration options in the:  
H
H
FrameSaver SLV 9124 Quick Reference  
Configuration Option Tables  
If the factory default settings do not support your network’s configuration, you can  
customize the configuration options to better suit your application.  
Four configuration option storage areas are available.  
Configuration Option Area Description  
Current Configuration  
The currently active set of configuration options.  
Customer Configuration 1  
An alternate set of configuration options that the  
customer can set up and store for future use.  
Customer Configuration 2  
Another alternate set of configuration options that the  
customer can set up and store for future use.  
Default Factory Configuration A read-only configuration area containing the factory  
default set of configuration options.  
You can load and edit default factory configuration  
settings, but you can only save those changes to the  
Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration  
option areas.  
The Current, Customer 1, and Customer 2 configuration  
option areas are identical to the Default Factory  
Configuration until modified by the customer.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options  
To access and display configuration options, load (copy) the applicable  
configuration option set into the edit area.  
" Procedure  
To load a set of configuration options for editing:  
1. From the Main Menu, press the down arrow key so the cursor is on  
Configuration.  
2. Press Enter to display the Configuration menu. The Load Configuration  
From: menu appears.  
NOTE:  
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer  
Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time. Allow a minute or more  
for the file to be loaded.  
3. Select the configuration option area from which you want to load  
configuration options and press Enter (Current Configuration, Customer  
Configuration 1, Customer Configuration 2, or Default Factory Configuration).  
The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit  
area and the Configuration Edit/Display menu appears.  
This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Configuration  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Changing Configuration Options  
" Procedure  
To change configuration option settings:  
1. From the Configuration Edit/Display menu, select a set of configuration  
options and press Enter.  
For example:  
Configuration → PVC Connections  
2. Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network, and  
make appropriate changes to the setting(s). See Chapter 2, User Interface  
and Basic Operation, for additional information.  
When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs, some  
configuration options will be blank. For a valid setting to appear, Tab to the  
configuration option and press the spacebar.  
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete.  
NOTE:  
— Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options.  
— Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and  
run tests.  
— Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options; they  
cannot change configuration options or run tests.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Saving Configuration Options  
When changes to the configuration options are complete, use the Save function  
key to save your changes to either the Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2  
configuration areas.  
NOTE:  
When changing settings, you must Save for changes to take effect.  
" Procedure  
To save the configuration option changes:  
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Type s or S to select the Save function and press Enter.  
The Save Configuration To: screen appears.  
NOTE:  
If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes, a Save  
Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response.  
— If you select No, the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes  
are not saved.  
— If you select Yes, the Save Configuration To: screen appears.  
3. Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes  
(usually the Current Configuration) and press Enter.  
When Save is complete, Command Completeappears in the message area  
at the bottom of the screen.  
NOTE:  
There are other methods of changing configurations, like SNMP and  
Auto-Configuration. Since multiple sessions can be active at the same  
time, the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes  
being made. For instance:  
— Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration  
changes made via another method to be lost.  
— If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and  
saves them, your changes would be lost.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units  
At a minimum, the following configuration options must be set before deploying a  
a FrameSaver unit to a remote site:  
H
H
Node IP Address  
Node Subnet Mask  
See Table 3-11, Node IP Options, for a description of these options.  
Entering System Information and  
Setting the System Clock  
Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the  
unit, its location, and a contact for the unit, as well as to set the system clock.  
Main Menu → Control → System Information  
The following information is available for viewing. Save any entries or changes.  
If the selection is . . . Enter the . . .  
Device Name  
Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters.  
SNMP system name; can be up to 255 characters.  
System Name  
System Location  
System Contact  
System’s physical location; can be up to 255 characters.  
Name and how to contact the system person; can be up to  
255 characters.  
Date  
Time  
Current date in the month/day/year format (mm/dd/yyyy).  
Current time in the hours:minutes format (hh:mm).  
NOTE:  
To clear existing information, place the cursor in the Clear field (Tab to the  
Clear field) and press Enter.  
See Chapter 4, Security and Logins, to set up and administer logins.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Setting Up for Trap Dial-Out  
An external modem can be attached to the COM port for dialing out when an  
SNMP trap is generated.  
To set up an external modem, you need to:  
1. Set up SNMP trap managers.  
2. Set up an external modem.  
3. Set up Modem Directory phone numbers.  
4. Configure trap dial-out.  
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options to set up SNMP trap managers.  
See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out when trap dial-out is desired.  
See Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out for trap and alarm information.  
Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial-Out  
When trap dial-out is desired, the PC or asynchronous terminal must be  
disconnected from the unit’s COM port when setup is complete, and an external  
modem connected instead. See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External  
Modem for additional information.  
Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial-Out  
" Procedure  
1. Set up directory phone numbers.  
Main Menu → Control → Modem Call Directories  
2. Select Directory Number A (for Alarm).  
3. Enter the phone number(s).  
Valid characters include . . . For . . .  
ASCII text  
Entering the phone number.  
Readability characters.  
Space,  
underscore ( _ ), and  
dash (–)  
Comma (,)  
Readability character for a 2-second pause.  
Blind dialing.  
B
P
T
Pulse dialing, unless B is specified.  
Tone dialing, unless B is specified.  
Wait for dial tone.  
W
4. Save the phone number(s).  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Setting Up Auto-Configuration  
The auto-configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic  
configuration and connection of DLCIs within the FrameSaver unit, as well as to  
automatically remove DLCIs and connections that are no longer supported by the  
network service provider. Auto-configuration also maintains associated DLCI  
option settings when Standard LMI is used on the network interface.  
Main Menu → Auto-Configuration  
Auto-Configuration Screen Example  
main/auto-configuration  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
1/26/1999 23:32  
AUTO-CONFIGURATION  
Frame Relay Discovery Mode:  
Automatic Circuit Removal:  
1MPort  
Enable  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Save  
MainMenu  
Exit  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode  
When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active, the FrameSaver unit “discovers”  
network DLCIs from the network LMI status response message. It configures a  
network DLCI, a user data port DLCI, and automatically connects them to create  
a PVC.  
Main Menu → Auto-Configuration → Frame Relay Discovery Mode  
Automatically configured network DLCIs are multiplexed, and each automatically  
configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding  
network DLCI. These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been  
available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link, between your  
equipment and the network.  
NOTE:  
A local Management PVC (e.g., the PVC between the router and the  
FrameSaver unit’s user data port) must be configured manually; it cannot  
be configured automatically (see Setting Up Local Management at the  
Central Site).  
The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected:  
Discovery Mode  
Configuration Description  
1MPort  
H Auto-configuration is enabled on Port-1.  
(default)  
H A management DLCI is configured.  
H A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded  
DLCIs (EDLCIs) is configured for Port-1 user data and  
management data.  
H A PVC connection is configured between the network  
and port DLCIs.  
1Port  
H Auto-configuration is enabled on Port-1.  
H No management DLCI is configured.  
H A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port-1  
user data.  
H A PVC connection is configured between the network  
and port DLCIs.  
NetOnly  
Disable  
H Auto-configuration of a network DLCI only; no Port-1 or  
PVC connections are configured.  
H No Port-1, PVC connection, or management DLCI is  
configured.  
H No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration  
takes place.  
The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
NOTE:  
If 1MPort (the default) is not the setting required for your application, change  
the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the network cable or  
editing discovered option settings. Otherwise, the FrameSaver unit will start  
“discovering” DLCIs as soon as it powers up.  
To recover from this problem, edit a selected “discovered” DLCI or PVC  
connection manually if any DLCIs or PVC Connections have been configured  
manually. If only a local management PVC between the router and the  
FrameSaver unit has been configured, select the desired Frame Relay  
Discovery Mode and Save the change.  
The default discovery mode is 1MPort (management DLCIs multiplexed with data  
DLCIs on Port-1, which creates two embedded DLCIs [EDLCIs] – one EDLCI for  
Port-1 user data, and another EDLCI for management data); that is, for each  
DLCI discovered on the network, a multiplexed network DLCI and a standard  
data port DLCI will be configured and connected, and a Management PVC will be  
embedded in the network DLCI. When LMI is active on the network interface and  
PVC status information (with provisioned DLCI numbers) is next received from  
the network, the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration  
area.  
Configuration options set by the selected discovery mode can be manually  
modified, refined, or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus.  
No previously discovered and configured DLCIs or cross-connections will be  
removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled (see  
Automatically Removing a Circuit). Additional discovered DLCIs will be configured  
according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting. Selecting or  
changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks.  
NOTE:  
When auto-configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI, but a standard DLCI is  
needed, change the DLCI to standard from the network DLCI Records  
screen: Configuration → Network → DLCI Records  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved, the Saving will  
cause Auto-Configuration to update and Restart. Are you  
sure?prompt appears. No is the default for this prompt.  
H
If Yes (y) is entered, the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections?  
prompt appears. No is the default for this prompt.  
— If Yes is entered, all multiplexed DLCIs and PVC Connections are  
deleted, except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the  
primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as  
TS Management Link.  
— If No is entered, previously discovered and auto-configured option  
settings will not be removed, but configuration updates due to LMI  
response messages are performed according to the just saved mode  
setting.  
H
If No (n) is entered, or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt,  
no Auto-Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI  
response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting.  
Automatically Removing a Circuit  
Using the automatic circuit removal feature, which comes enabled, network  
DLCIs and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit’s configuration  
when the the network service provider no longer supports them. Automatic  
deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active  
frame relay link.  
When this feature is set to:  
H
Enable – The following will be automatically removed from the unit’s  
configuration:  
— Unsupported network DLCIs and PVC connections that include  
multiplexed network DLCIs.  
— Unsupported standard network DLCIs that are not configured as the  
primary destination in a management PVC.  
— Non-management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCIs  
are included.  
— DLCIs not included in three consecutive LMI full status response  
messages.  
— LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI.  
All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and  
they revert to their default settings.  
A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down,  
or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link.  
H
Disable – Unused network DLCIs, PVC connections, and management PVCs  
must be manually removed.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Setting Up Management  
FrameSaver units are already set up for SNMP management, with Community  
Name 1 set to Public and Name 1 Access set to Read/Write. For remote sites,  
other than the IP Address, this is all that is required.  
Configuration → Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
See Table 3-13, General SNMP Management Options, for configuration  
information. For the central site, local management between the unit and the  
router must be set up, as well (see Setting Up Local Management at the Central  
Site).  
Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site  
Set up a local management PVC between the central site unit and its router for  
local management control by the end-user customer.  
" Procedure  
To set up management through the router:  
1. Create a DLCI that will be used for management on the user data port.  
Configuration → Data Ports → DLCI Records  
2. Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just created.  
Configuration → Management and Communication → Management PVC  
Minimally, enter the following options:  
— Name for the management PVC  
— Interface IP Address and Subnet Mask, if different from the Node’s  
— Primary Link for this Management PVC (the user data port)  
— Primary DLCI (i.e., the data port DLCI)  
3. Save the configuration.  
See Table 3-9, DLCI Record Options, and Table 3-12, Management PVC Options,  
for configuration information.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP  
Using the system’s standard Routing Information Protocol (RIP) feature, routing  
information is passed to the router over the management PVC, so the router can  
learn routes to FrameSaver SLV devices. Node IP information should be set up  
(see Configuring Node IP Information).  
" Procedure  
1. Configure the router to receive RIP.  
For example, if using a Cisco router, configure config-t, router RIP,  
int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1, then ctl-z WR.  
2. Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port.  
Configuration → Data Ports → DLCI Records  
3. Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured.  
Configuration → Management and Communication → Management PVCs  
4. Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out, and Save the configuration.  
Refer to Table 3-9, DLCI Record Options, and Table 3-12. Management PVC  
Options for configuration information.  
Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site  
When management needs to be set up between a service provider’s customer  
and its network operations center (NOC), a non-multiplexed DLCI must be  
configured to carry management data between the customer’s central site and  
the NOC console. This requires that a frame relay discovered DLCI needs to be  
modified. This is because all auto-configured network DLCIs are configured as  
multiplexed DLCIs.  
" Procedure  
To set up NOC management:  
1. Select DLCI Records on the network interface.  
Configuration → Network → DLCI Records  
2. Select Modify. The Modify DLCI Record for DLCI Numberprompt  
appears.  
3. Select the DLCI that will be used by pressing the spacebar until the correct  
DLCI number appears, then select it.  
4. Change the DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard.  
The DLCI in connections. Update DLCI usage as follows:  
prompt appears.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
5. Select the Delete EDLCI Connections and Make a Mgmt Only  
PVCoption.  
PVC connections for the selected DLCI are broken, the Port-1 DLCI mapped  
to this network DLCI and the embedded management DLCI (EDLCI) are  
deleted, and the selected DLCI will be reconfigured as a management PVC  
using the Node IP Address.  
See Table 3-9, DLCI Record Options, for configuration information.  
Setting Up Back-to-Back Operation  
Using this special feature, you can set up two FrameSaver units that are  
connected back-to-back without frame relay switches between them, as in a  
test bench setup.  
Changing Operating Mode  
When setting up back-to-back operation:  
H
H
One unit must be configured for Standard operation, which is the setting for  
normal operation.  
The other unit must be configured for Back-to-Back operation so it presents  
the network side of the UNI (user-network interface).  
Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed.  
" Procedure  
To set up back-to-back operation:  
1. On the unit to be configured for Back-to-Back operation, manually configure  
DLCIs; DLCIs should be configured before connecting the two units.  
2. Access the Change Operating Mode screen.  
Main Menu → Control → Change Operating Mode  
3. Select Back-to-Back Operation, and respond Yes to the Are you sure?  
prompt.  
4. Save the change.  
" Procedure  
To return the unit to normal operation:  
1. Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard  
Operation.  
2. Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change. The units can be  
reconnected to a standard frame relay network.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuration Option Tables  
Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order,  
even though this may not be the order in which you access each when  
configuring the unit.  
The following configuration option tables are included:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Table 3-1. System Frame Relay and LMI Options  
Table 3-2. Service Level Verification Options  
Table 3-3. General System Options  
Table 3-4. Network Physical Interface Options  
Table 3-5. Data Port Physical Interface Options  
Table 3-6. DSX-1 Physical Interface Options  
Table 3-7. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (when  
Assigning DSX-1-to-Network Time Slots/Cross Connections)  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Table 3-8. Interface Frame Relay Options  
Table 3-9. DLCI Record Options  
Table 3-10. PVC Connection Options  
Table 3-11. Node IP Options  
Table 3-12. Management PVC Options  
Table 3-13. General SNMP Management Options  
Table 3-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options  
Table 3-15. SNMP NMS Security Options  
Table 3-16. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options  
Table 3-17. Communication Port Options  
Table 3-18. External Modem (COM Port) Options  
Configuring the Overall System  
The System menu includes the following:  
H
H
H
Frame Relay and LMI  
Service Level Verification  
General  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System  
Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the  
Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system (see Table 3-1).  
Main Menu → Configuration → System → Frame Relay and LMI  
See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface to set an interface’s frame relay  
options.  
Table 3-1. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (1 of 2)  
LMI Behavior  
Possible Settings: Independent,  
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1,  
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1,  
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1  
Default Setting: Independent  
Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to  
another, determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state. Sometimes  
referred to as LMI pass-through.  
Independent – Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state  
of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface. Provides LMI  
Spoofing. This is the recommended setting when backup is configured, and for Network  
Service Providers (NSPs).  
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on  
Port-1 goes down, disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads.  
When LMI on Port-1 comes back up, the network interface is reenabled. The LMI state  
on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port-1. That is, the network  
interface’s LMI follows Port-1’s LMI. Used at central sites, this setting is useful when the  
remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a  
redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure. Not  
recommended for NSPs.  
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on Port-1 when LMI on the network  
interface goes down, disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads. When LMI on the  
network interface comes back up, Port-1 is reenabled and its control leads are  
reasserted. The LMI state on Port-1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network  
interface. That is, Port-1’s LMI follows the network interface’s LMI. This setting is useful  
if the router connected to Port-1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are  
detected.  
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on the network interface  
when LMI on Port-1 goes down (or LMI down on Port-1 when LMI on the network  
interface goes down), and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the  
other interface. That is, the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other. Use  
this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit. It is not recommended  
since it makes fault isolation more difficult.  
LMI Error Event (N2)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 3  
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can  
occur on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network  
sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-1. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (2 of 2)  
LMI Clearing Event (N3)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 1  
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free  
messages that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user  
and network sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.  
LMI Status Enquiry (N1)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . 255  
Default Setting: 6  
Configures the LMI-defined N1 parameter, which sets the number of status enquiry  
polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is  
initiated. Applies to the user side of a UNI only.  
1 – 255 – Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated  
before a full status enquiry is initiated.  
LMI Heartbeat (T1)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 10  
Configures the LMI-defined T1 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI. Applies to the user  
side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 15  
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the  
network side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 20  
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the  
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry  
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring Service Level Verification Options  
SLV options are selected from the System menu (see Table 3-2).  
Main Menu → Configuration → System → Service Level Verification  
Table 3-2. Service Level Verification Options (1 of 2)  
SLV Sample Interval (secs)  
Possible Settings: 10 – 3600  
Default Setting: 60  
Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices. Inband  
communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency, as well as transmission  
success and other SLV information.  
10 – 3600 – Sets the SLV Sample Interval (secs) in seconds.  
SLV Delivery Ratio  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios (FDR/DDR)  
between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled. To use this capability, both ends of all  
PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV devices. If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or  
9624s, they must be running software version 1.2 or higher.  
Enable – An extra byte for FDR/DDR statistics collection is included with each frame,  
which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the  
network.  
Disable – Extra byte is not included.  
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout  
Available Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to  
determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units.  
NOTE: This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCIs connected to a far-end unit  
with hardware bypass capability.  
Enable – After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded,  
causing the DLCI’s status to turn Inactive, an alarm and SNMP trap are generated, and  
a Health and Status message created.  
Disable – Missed SLV communications will not be monitored.  
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold  
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20  
Default Setting: 3  
Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be  
detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared.  
1–20 – Sets the limit for these error events.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-2. Service Level Verification Options (2 of 2)  
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold  
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20  
Default Setting: 1  
Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the  
DLCI Inactive status is cleared.  
1 – 20 – Sets the limit for the clearing event.  
SLV Packet Size (bytes)  
Available Settings: 64 – 2048  
Default Setting: 64  
Sets the size of packets, in bytes, that will be used for SLV communications. SLV  
packets are used to track latency and other SLV-related variables.  
When the packet size is changed, a new round trip and average latency calculation  
must be performed, so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance  
Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred.  
64 – 2048 – Sets the packet size for SLV communications.  
SLV Synchronization Role  
Available Settings: Tributary, Controller, None  
Default Setting: Tributary  
Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data  
collection and storage between SLV devices.  
Tributary – Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and  
provides network-based synchronization information to other devices in the network.  
Controller – Uses its own internal time-of-day clock and provides synchronization  
information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock.  
NOTE: Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV  
synchronization controller.  
None – Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out.  
This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable, or  
when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring General System Options  
Select General from the System menu to configure the general system  
configuration options (see Table 3-3).  
Main Menu → Configuration → System→ General  
Table 3-3. General System Options (1 of 2)  
Test Timeout  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they  
are terminated automatically.  
Enable – All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout. This setting is recommended  
when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in-band data stream. If the  
FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface  
providing the management access, control can be regained after the timeout expires,  
terminating the test.  
Disable – Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated.  
Test Duration (min)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 120  
Default Setting: 10  
Specifies the maximum duration of the tests.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable.  
1 – 120 – Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes (inclusive).  
Primary Clock Source  
Possible Settings: Net1, DSX, Internal  
Default Setting: Net1  
Allows you to select the primary clock source for the unit. The source selected provides  
all of the timing within the FrameSaver unit and the clocks for all of the external  
interfaces. Failure of the clock specified by this configuration option results in automatic  
fallback to the Secondary Clock Source configuration option setting.  
NOTE: For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options, only Internal can be  
selected for both options. All other selections must have different settings  
(e.g., if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1, Secondary Clock Source  
cannot be set to Net1).  
Net1 – The primary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface.  
DSX – The primary clock is derived from the DSX-T1 interface. This setting only  
appears if the DSX-1 interface is installed and enabled (see Configuring the DSX-1  
Interface).  
Internal – The primary clock is the internal clock.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-3. General System Options (2 of 2)  
Secondary Clock Source  
Possible Settings: Net1, DSX, Internal  
Default Setting: Internal  
Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fails. The source  
selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the  
clocks for all of the external interfaces.  
The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and  
is stable for 10 seconds. If the secondary clock source fails, the clock source will switch  
to internal. The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source  
returns and is stable for 10 seconds.  
NOTE: For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options, only Internal can be  
selected for both options. All other selections must have different settings  
(e.g., if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1, Secondary Clock Source  
cannot be set to Net1).  
Net1 – The secondary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface.  
DSX – The secondary clock is derived from the DSX-T1 interface. This setting only  
appears if the DSX-1 interface is installed and enabled (see Configuring the DSX-1  
Interface).  
Internal – The secondary clock is the internal clock.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring the Physical Interfaces  
Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured:  
H
H
H
Network Interface  
User Data Port  
DSX-1 Interface Physical Options  
Configuring the Network Interface  
When configuring the physical characteristics for the network interface, select  
Physical from the Network menu (see Table 3-4).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Network → Physical  
Table 3-4. Network Physical Interface Options (1 of 4)  
Line Framing Format  
Possible Settings: D4, ESF  
Default Setting: ESF  
Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network  
interface.  
D4 – Uses D4 framing format.  
NOTE: This setting is not recommended by network carriers. False yellow alarms  
may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle, or  
when there is light traffic when other settings are selected. ESF format  
does not create this problem.  
ESF – Uses Extended Superframe framing format.  
Line Coding Format  
Possible Settings: AMI, B8ZS  
Default Setting: B8ZS  
Specifies the line coding format for the network interface.  
AMI – Uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding format.  
B8ZS – Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS) line coding format.  
Line Build Out (LBO)  
Possible Settings: 0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5  
Default Setting: 0.0  
Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network.  
0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5 – Specifies line build out in dB.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-4. Network Physical Interface Options (2 of 4)  
Bit Stuffing  
Possible Settings: 62411, Disable  
Default Setting: 62411  
Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data  
transmitted to the network.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Line Coding Format is set  
to B8ZS.  
62411 – Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density  
of ones falls below 12.5%. This setting complies with AT&T TR 62411, but is not  
recommended for frame relay data because it inserts errors in the data traffic.  
Disable – Disables bit stuffing. Ones density is not enforced on data sent to the  
network.  
Transmit Timing  
Possible Settings: System, Interface  
Default Setting: System  
Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from  
the currently selected interface.  
System – Transmit timing is derived from the current system clock source (see  
Table 3-3, General System Options).  
Interface – Transmit timing is derived from this interface.  
NOTE: When Interface is configured, the clock must be synchronized to the  
system clock source.  
Network Initiated LLB  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback (LLB) to be controlled by the  
receipt of LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands from the network.  
Enable – LLB is controlled by LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands. Receiving a  
LLB-Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a line loopback (provided  
an LLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit’s current state). Receiving an  
LLB-Release command terminates the LLB.  
Disable – The FrameSaver unit ignores the LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands.  
NOTE: When disabled, the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 or  
AT&T TR 62411.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-4. Network Physical Interface Options (3 of 4)  
Network Initiated PLB  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback (PLB) to be controlled by  
the receipt of PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands from the network.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set  
to ESF.  
Enable – PLB is controlled by PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands. Receiving a  
PLB-Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback (provided a PLB  
can be performed in the unit’s current state). Receiving a PLB-Release command  
terminates the PLB.  
Disable – The FrameSaver unit ignores the PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands.  
NOTE: When disabled, the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 or  
AT&T TR 54016.  
Network Initiated DCLB  
Possible Settings: Disable, V.54_&_ANSI  
Default Setting: V.54_&_ANSI  
Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback (DCLB V.54 Loop 2)  
to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB-actuate or DCLB-release sequence (either  
V.54 or FT1-ANSI compliant) from the network on the DS0s used for the network frame  
relay link. When enabled and a DCLB-activate sequence is received, the unit initiates a  
DCLB on the network interface. When a DCLB-release sequence is received, the DCLB  
is stopped.  
Disable – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences are ignored.  
V.54_&_ANSI – DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either  
V.54 or ANSI T1.403, Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initiation and  
termination of a DCLB for the network frame relay link. The actuate and release  
sequences do not need to match (for example, a DCLB started with a V.54 actuate  
sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence).  
ANSI Performance Report Messages  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether ANSI T1.403 compliance performance report messages (PRMs) are  
generated and sent to the network over the ESF facility data link every second.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set  
to ESF.  
Enable – Generates and sends PRMs.  
Disable – Does not generate and send PRMs.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-4. Network Physical Interface Options (4 of 4)  
Excessive Error Rate Threshold  
Possible Settings: 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9  
Default Setting: 10E-4  
Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared. The  
excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total  
number of bits received over a set period of time.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set  
to ESF.  
10E-4 – Declares an EER if more than 1,535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second  
period. Clears when fewer than 1,536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time  
period.  
10E-5 – Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second  
–4  
period or a 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are  
detected within the same time period.  
10E-6 – Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second  
–5  
–4  
period or a 10 or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are  
detected within the same time period.  
10E-7 – Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second  
–6  
–5  
–4  
period or a 10 , or 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6  
errors are detected within the same time period.  
10E-8 – Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute  
–7  
–6  
–5  
–4  
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer than  
42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period.  
10E-9 – Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute  
–8  
–7  
–6  
–5  
–4  
intervals or a 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , or 10 condition occurs. Clears when fewer  
than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period.  
Circuit Identifier  
Possible Settings: Text Field, Clear  
Default Setting: blank  
Identifies the transmission vendor’s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting.  
Text Field – Edit or display circuit identifier information (maximum 255 characters).  
Clear – Removes the circuit identifier information.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring the User Data Port  
Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to configure the physical  
characteristics for the user data port (see Table 3-5).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Data Ports → Physical  
Table 3-5. Data Port Physical Interface Options (1 of 2)  
Transmit Clock Source  
Possible Settings: Internal, External  
Default Setting: Internal  
Determines whether the DTE’s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by  
its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE.  
NOTE: Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit  
to abort any physical port tests, including any DTE-initiated loopback tests.  
Internal – The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB (ITU 114) – Transmit  
Signal Element Timing (TXC) (DCE source) for timing the incoming data.  
External – The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data, and the FrameSaver  
unit uses the interchange circuit DA (ITU 113) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (XTXC)  
(DTE source) for timing the incoming data.  
Invert Transmit Clock  
Possible Settings: Auto, Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Auto  
Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit  
DB (ITU 114) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (DCE Source) TXC is phase inverted  
with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data (TD).  
Auto – The port will check the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port. If  
necessary, the port will automatically phase invert the clock with respect to the  
transmitted data.  
Enable – Phase inverts the TXC clock. Use this setting when long cable lengths  
between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors.  
Disable – Does not phase invert the TXC clock.  
Monitor DTR  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready (DTR) circuit on the user data port will be  
used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE. When the  
DTR off condition is detected, an alarm is generated, LMI is declared down, and no  
further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.  
Enable – Interchange circuit CD (ITU 108/1/2) – DTR is monitored to determine when  
valid data is sent from the DTE.  
Disable – DTR is not monitored. DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being  
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-5. Data Port Physical Interface Options (2 of 2)  
Monitor RTS (Control)  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send (RTS) circuits on the user data port  
will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE.  
When the RTS off condition is detected, CTS is deasserted, LMI is declared down, and  
no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.  
Enable – Interchange circuit CA (ITU 105) – RTS is monitored to determine when valid  
data communication is possible with the DTE.  
Disable – RTS is not monitored. RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being  
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.  
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks  
Possible Settings: Local, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port’s attached  
data terminal equipment using the port’s interchange lead LL (ITU 141).  
Local – The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback.  
Disable – The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE  
Loopback.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring the DSX-1 Interface  
Select DSX-1 to display or change the physical configuration options when a  
DSX-1 interface is installed (see Table 3-6).  
Main Menu →Configuration → DSX-1  
Table 3-6. DSX-1 Physical Interface Options (1 of 2)  
Interface Status  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether the DSX-1 interface selected is available for use.  
Enable – The interface is available.  
Disable – The interface is not available for use. If there are time slots assigned to the  
DSX-1 interface when you attempt to disable it, the message This action will  
clear all DSX-1 Cross Connections. Are You Sure? Noappears. If you  
select:  
No – The operation is cancelled.  
Yes – The following occurs:  
H All existing DSX-1 interface cross-connect assignments are cleared.  
H Alarms or traps associated with the DSX-1 interface are not generated.  
H LEDs associated with the DSX-1 interface are held in an “off’’ state.  
Line Framing Format  
Possible Settings: D4, ESF  
Default Setting: ESF  
Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX-1  
interface.  
D4 – Uses D4 framing format.  
ESF – Uses Extended Superframe (ESF) framing format.  
Line Coding Format  
Possible Settings: AMI, B8ZS  
Default Setting: B8ZS  
Specifies the line coding format for the DSX-1 interface.  
AMI – Uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding format.  
B8ZS – Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS) line coding format.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-6. DSX-1 Physical Interface Options (2 of 2)  
Line Equalization  
Possible Settings: 0–133, 133–266, 266–399, 399–533, 533–655  
Default Setting: 0–133  
Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet.  
0–133 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the  
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.  
133–266 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the  
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.  
266–399 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the  
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.  
399–533 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 533 feet of cable between the  
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.  
533–655 – Equalization on the DSX-1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the  
FrameSaver unit and the DTE.  
Send All Ones on DSX-1 Failure  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the  
DSX-1 (LOS, continuous OOF, or AIS).  
Enable – Sends all ones on the DS0 channels allocated to the DSX-1 interface in the  
event of an LOS, AIS, or continuous OOS condition on the DSX-1 interface.  
Disable – No action is taken when a signal fails on the DSX-1 interface. The data  
received is passed through the network interface channels unchanged.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Assigning Time Slots/Cross Connections  
The system allows you to assign data paths between the various interfaces to  
share the T1 network. Assuming that the DSX-1 interface is enabled, you can  
make the following cross connection assignments:  
H
H
Frame relay links to the network interface time slots  
DSX-1 time slots to the network interface time slots  
You can also clear cross-connection assignments for the system, or for a  
selected slot or interface.  
NOTE:  
Although it is not required, it is suggested that you progress through each  
screen in order, from top to bottom.  
Use the following procedures to assign cross connections.  
Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface  
Before assigning network time slots for use by frame relay traffic, configure the  
Network physical and Frame Relay options (if needed), then allow Time Slot  
Discovery to autodetect and assign the appropriate time slots to frame relay.  
If there are multiple Frame Relay data links on the network interface, or if  
Time Slot Discovery is not currently active, you can manually assign time slots on  
the network interface for frame relay traffic using the Frame Relay Network  
Assignments screen. This screen is read-only when Time Slot Discovery is set to  
Enable for the network interface.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Frame Relay Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example  
main/config/tslot_assign/frame_relay  
9124  
Device Name: Node A  
5/26/1999 23:32  
FRAME RELAY NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENT  
Time Slot Discovery: Disable  
N01  
N02  
N03  
N04  
N05  
N06  
N07  
N08  
Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available  
N09  
N10  
N11  
N12  
N13  
N14  
N15  
N16  
Available Available FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1  
N17  
N118  
N19  
N20  
N21  
N22  
N23  
N24  
FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
Save  
ClearAll  
DSXAssign  
Value  
Meaning  
Time Slot  
Discovery  
Specifies whether the time slots used for frame relay traffic should  
be discovered from the network interface upon detection of an LMI  
failure. This option allows additional time slots to be added without  
manually reconfiguring the device.  
Ntt  
This field represents time slot tt of the selected network interface.  
Assigned  
The time slot is already assigned to something other than frame  
relay, so it is unavailable. Assigned time slots cannot be modified  
from this screen.  
Available  
The time slot is currently unassigned.  
FrameRly1  
The time slot is assigned to frame relay service, link 1.  
For easy movement between screens, select the DSXAssign function key to go  
directly to the DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen.  
Time Slot Assignment Rule:  
Valid network time slots are either Available or contain a frame relay link 1  
assignment.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
" Procedure  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Configuration → Time Slot Assignment →  
Frame Relay Network Assignments  
The Frame Relay Network Assignments screen appears. This screen  
contains a matrix of the current assignment status of all time slots on the  
network interface.  
2. Enable or disable Time Slot Discovery.  
— When enabled, the unit examines all time slots not cross-connected to  
other ports to determine which time slots are being used by the network  
for frame relay traffic. These time slots are set to FrameRly1. This is  
the factory default.  
— When disabled, time slot assignments must be manually configured.  
3. If Time Slot Discovery is disabled, assign network time slots for use by frame  
relay service, link 1, by typing FrameRly1 in the selected Network field.  
4. Repeat Step 3 until all desired time slots are assigned.  
5. Save the configuration.  
Assigning DSX-1 Time Slots to the Network Interface  
DSX-1 time slots are assigned by channel allocation, where you specify individual  
time slots. The DSX-1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX-1 time slots to  
the network interface (see Table 3-6, DSX-1 Physical Interface Options).  
Value  
Ntt  
Meaning  
It represents time slot tt of the selected network interface.  
Assigned  
The time slot is already assigned to something other than a DSX-1  
time slot, so it is unavailable. Assigned time slots cannot be  
modified from this screen.  
Available  
The time slot is currently unassigned.  
Ds-p/tt  
Time slot tt of DSX-1 interface p in slot s is assigned to the network  
interface time slot identified right above it (Ntt).  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
DSX-1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example (Page 1)  
main/config/tslot_assign/dsx  
Device Name: Node A  
9124  
5/26/1999 23:32  
DSX-1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS  
Page 1 of 2  
N01  
N02  
N03  
N04  
N05  
N06  
N07  
N08  
D01-1/01 D01-1/02 D01-1/03 D01-1/04 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned  
N09  
N10  
N11  
N12  
N13  
N14  
N15  
N16  
D01-1/09 D01-1/01 Available Available Available Available Available Available  
N17  
N118  
N19  
N20  
N21  
N22  
N23  
N24  
Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll  
MainMenu  
Exit  
FrAssign  
Page 2 of 2 is for defining signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each  
DSX-1 interface time slot. See DSX-1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk  
Conditioning for an example of this screen.  
For easy movement between screens, select the FrAssign function key to go  
directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen.  
Time Slot Assignment Rules:  
H
H
H
Valid Network time slots are either Available or contain a DSX-1 time slot  
assignment.  
Valid DSX-1 time slots are those that are unassigned, including the currently  
assigned time slot.  
Order of display is as follows:  
— Available is the first selection.  
— Then, from the lowest DSX-1 interface to the highest DSX-1 interface.  
— Then the lowest available time slot number to the highest available time  
slot number.  
For example, if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under  
assigned time slot Ntt, pressing the spacebar causes this field’s values to  
cycle through all valid DSX-1 time slots, starting with Ds-p/yy, assuming it is  
unassigned. If Ds-p/tt is already assigned, the next valid time slot in the order  
described above is displayed.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
" Procedure  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Configuration → Time Slot Assignment→ DSX-to-Network Assignments  
The DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen appears. This screen contains a  
matrix of the current cross-connect status of all time slots on the network  
interface.  
2. Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited (underlined). Use the  
spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment.  
3. Repeat Step 2 until all desired time slots are assigned.  
4. Save the configuration.  
DSX-1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning (Page 2)  
The second page of the DSX-1 to Network Assignments screen allows you to  
define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each time slot on the  
DSX-1 interface. You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is  
being passed within a given DS0, and the value of the signaling bits that will be  
transmitted for that DS0 to the other cross-connected T1 network interface if a  
Carrier Group Alarm (CGA) occurs on a T1 network interface.  
DSX-1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example (Page 2)  
main/config/tslot_assign/dsx  
Device Name: Node A  
9124  
5/26/1999 23:32  
DSX-1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS  
SIGNALING AND TRUNK CONDITIONING  
Page 2 of 2  
DSX-1 Side  
Network 1 Side  
DSX-1 Side  
Network 1 Side  
Net1/01 E&M-busy - D01-1/01 E&M-busy  
Net1/03 E&M-busy - D01-1/03 E&M-busy  
Net1/02 E&M-busy - D01-1/01 E&M-busy  
Net1/04 E&M-busy - D01-1/04 E&M-busy  
Net1/09 None  
- D01-1/09 None  
Net1/10 None  
- D01-1/10 None  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll FrAssign  
For easy movement between screens, select the FrAssign function key to go  
directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen.  
Only those DSX-1-to-Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this  
page, from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order, by network and time  
slot.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
When a CGA condition (LOS, OOF, or AIS) is declared for a T1 interface, the  
signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DS0 are forced to  
idle for two seconds (except for user-defined patterns which are transmitted  
immediately). This drops any call in progress. The signaling bits are then forced  
to the selected state (Busy or Idle), and remain in this state until the CGA  
condition clears. At this point, the received signaling bits from the T1 interface  
which formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1  
interface.  
NOTE:  
Trunk conditioning will only occur on DS0s that are cross-connected to  
another T1 interface. All other DS0s remain unaffected by trunk conditioning.  
Enter one of the values shown in Table 3-7 in each of the fields on both the  
Network side and the DSX-1 side. Although you can choose any value for the  
DSX-1 side, the default value displayed is based on a typical setting that would  
be used with the corresponding Network side value. Typical pairs of values are  
shown in the table below. If you change the Network side value, the DSX side  
value is changed to the corresponding default value.  
Table 3-7. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (1 of 3)  
Network Side Meaning  
DSX-1 Side  
None  
No signaling used on this DS0. Use this setting if  
there is no voice signaling information being passed  
None  
on this DS0 (clear channel).  
RBS (default)  
Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DS0, but no  
trunk conditioning. Signaling bits will be passed to the  
T1 interface to which this DS0 is cross-connected  
when this T1 interface is not in CGA, but the  
RBS  
signaling bits will be all ones when CGA is present.  
The following values configure the cross-connect for RBS, as well as perform the  
trunk conditioning. Although ABCD signaling bits for each setting are described,  
only AB bits are transmitted when the cross-connected T1 network interface is  
using D4 framing.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Table 3-7. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (2 of 3)  
Network Side Meaning  
DSX-1 Side  
E&M-idle  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected E&M idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
an E&M interface (ABCD = 0000).  
E&M-busy  
FXOg-idle  
FXOg-busy  
FXOl-idle  
FXOl-busy  
FXSg-idle  
FXSg-busy  
FXSl-idle  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected E&M busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an E&M interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSg-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
an FXO Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSg-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an FXO Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSl-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
an FXO Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSl-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an FXO Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOg-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
an FXS Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOg-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an FXS Ground-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOl-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
an FXS Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 0101).  
FXSl-busy  
FXOD-idle  
FXOD-busy  
FXSD-idle  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOl-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an FXS Loop-Start interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSD-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
an FXODN interface (ABCD = 0000).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXSD-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an FXODN interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOD-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
an FXSDN interface (ABCD = 0000).  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Table 3-7. Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values (3 of 3)  
Network Side Meaning  
DSX-1 Side  
FXSD-busy  
PLAR3idle  
PLAR3busy  
PLAR4idle  
PLAR4busy  
DPO-idle  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected FXOD-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an FXSDN interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR3idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
a PLAR D3 interface (ABCD = 0000).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR3busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an PLAR D3 interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR4idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
a PLAR D4 interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected PLAR4busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for an PLAR D4 interface (ABCD = 0000).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPT-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
a DPO interface (ABCD = 0000).  
DPO-busy  
DPT-idle  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPT-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for a DPO interface (ABCD = 1111).  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPO-idle  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for  
a DPT interface (ABCD = 0000).  
DPT-busy  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected DPO-busy  
T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state  
for a DPT interface (ABCD = 1111).  
1
USER-xxxx  
The signaling bits transmitted to the cross-connected USER-xxxx  
T1 interface during a CGA represent a user-defined  
pattern of ABCD = xxxx.  
1
xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX-1 sides.  
Clearing Assignments  
Clearing assignments sets all time slots to Unassgn (unassigned).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Time Slot Assignment → Clear Assignments  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface  
Select Frame Relay from the interface’s menu to display or change the Frame  
Relay options for an individual interface (see Table 3-8).  
Main Menu → Configuration → [Network/Data Ports] → Frame Relay  
See Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System for additional information.  
Table 3-8. Interface Frame Relay Options (1 of 3)  
LMI Protocol  
Possible Settings: Initialize_From_Net1FR1, Initialize_From_Interface,  
Auto_On_LMI_Fail, Standard, Annex-A, Annex-D  
Default Setting:  
For user data port links: Initialize_From_Interface  
For network links: Auto_On_LMI_Fail  
Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery  
source for the LMI protocol.  
Initialize_From_Net1FR1 – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be  
configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame  
relay link (Net1FR1). LMI Protocol is set to None internally, but once a protocol has  
become active or is set on the primary Network link, the protocol will be set to the same  
value on this link (Standard, Annex-A or Annex-D). The protocol will not be updated  
based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially.  
Display Conditions – This option value only appears for a user data port.  
Initialize_From_Interface – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be  
configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE  
device. Once a protocol has become active, the protocol will be set to the protocol  
discovered (Standard, Annex-A or Annex-D) on the frame relay link. The protocol will not  
be updated after being initially discovered. Frame relay links on user data ports discover  
the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls. Frame relay links on the  
network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and  
“listening” for correct poll response messages.  
Auto_On_LMI_Fail – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured  
to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device  
whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs. This option is available for frame relay links  
on the Port and network interfaces. Frame relay links on user data ports discover the  
LMI protocol from LMI status polls by attached DTE devices. Frame relay links on the  
network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and  
“listening” for correct poll response messages.  
Standard – Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the  
Standard LMI.  
Annex-A – Supports LMI as specified by Q.933, Annex A.  
Annex-D – Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1.617, Annex D.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-8. Interface Frame Relay Options (2 of 3)  
LMI Parameters  
Possible Settings: System, Custom  
Default Setting: System  
Allows you to use the system LMI options, or to set specific LMI options for this  
interface.  
System – Use system LMI options (see Table 3-1, System Frame Relay and LMI  
Options).  
Custom – Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters.  
LMI Error Event (N2)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 3  
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can  
occur on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network  
sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.  
LMI Clearing Event (N3)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10  
Default Setting: 1  
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free  
messages that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user  
and network sides of a UNI.  
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.  
LMI Status Enquiry (N1)  
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . 255  
Default Setting: 6  
Configures the LMI-defined N1 parameter, which sets the number of status enquiry  
polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is  
initiated. Applies to the user side of a UNI only.  
1 – 255 – Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated  
before a full status enquiry is initiated.  
LMI Heartbeat (T1)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 10  
Configures the LMI-defined T1 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI. Applies to the user  
side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-8. Interface Frame Relay Options (3 of 3)  
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 15  
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between  
the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the  
network side of a UNI only.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry  
messages in increments of 5.  
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)  
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30  
Default Setting: 20  
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the  
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry  
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.  
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.  
Frame Relay DS0s Base Rate  
Possible Settings: Nx64, Nx56  
Default Setting: Nx64  
Selects the base rate for the DS0s allocated to frame relay on the network interface.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears for the network interface.  
Nx64 – The base rate is 64 kbps.  
Nx56 – The base rate is 56 kbps.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records  
The Auto-Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their  
PVC Connections. DLCI Records can also be created manually (see Table 3-9).  
Main Menu→ Configuration→ [Network/Data Port]→ DLCI Records  
Typically, DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management  
PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit; the unit automatically  
configures non-management DLCI Records and PVC Connections.  
Table 3-9. DLCI Record Options (1 of 3)  
DLCI Number  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record. The parameter determines which  
DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface. DLCI  
numbers range from 0 to 1023. However, the numbers 0 – 15 and 1008 – 1023 are  
reserved. Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of  
Range (16 – 1007). If the DLCI number is part of a connection, this field is read-only.  
NOTES: – If a DLCI number is not entered, the DLCI record is not created.  
– The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface.  
– Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver  
unit to abort any active frame relay tests.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).  
DLCI Type  
Possible Settings: Standard, Multiplexed  
Default Setting:  
For user data port DLCIs: Standard  
For network interface DLCIs: Multiplexed  
Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed. This field is read-only when the  
selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is  
Standard.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for a user data port, and it cannot  
be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Management Link.  
Standard – Supports standard DLCIs as specified by the Frame Relay Standards. Use  
this setting when a non-FrameSaver unit is at the other end. For user data port DLCIs,  
this is the only selection available.  
Multiplexed – Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI. Allows a  
single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCIs as long as these  
connections are between the same two endpoints (proprietary). Do not select  
Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-9. DLCI Record Options (2 of 3)  
CIR (bps)  
Possible Settings: 0 – 1536000  
Default Setting: 64000  
Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry  
without discarding frames; the CIR in bits per second. Entry of an invalid rate causes the  
error message Value Out of Range (0 –x), where x = the maximum line rate  
available on the port.  
0 – 1536000 – Specifies the network-committed data rate.  
Tc  
Possible Settings: 1 – 65535  
Default Setting: Read Only  
Displays the DLCI’s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval (Tc) in  
milliseconds. This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst  
Size Bc (Bits) and CIR (bps) options.  
Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits)  
Possible Settings: CIR, Other  
Default Setting: CIR  
Specifies whether the DLCI’s committed burst size will follow the CIR, or whether it will  
be entered independently. This value is the maximum amount of data that the service  
provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval (Tc).  
CIR – Uses the value in the CIR (bps) option as the committed burst size (Bc). The Bc  
and excess burst size (Be) options are updated when a CIR update is received from the  
network switch.  
Other – Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI. When Other is  
selected, the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained, as well.  
Bc  
Possible Settings: 0 – 1536000  
Default Setting: 64000  
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s committed burst size.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set  
to Other.  
Excess Burst Size (Bits)  
Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the  
CIR without discarding frames.  
Be  
Possible Settings: 0 – 1536000  
Default Setting: 1472000  
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s excess burst size.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-9. DLCI Record Options (3 of 3)  
DLCI Priority  
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High  
Default Setting: High  
Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device  
(also known as quality of service). All data on Port 1 is cut-through, as long as there is  
no higher-priority data queued from another user port. The DLCI priority set for an  
interface applies to data coming into that interface. For example, the priority set for  
DLCIs on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment (such  
as a router).  
Display Conditions – This option is not available for the network interface.  
Low – Data configured for the DLCI has low priority.  
Medium – Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.  
High – Data configured for the DLCI has high priority.  
Outbound Management Priority  
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High  
Default Setting: Medium  
Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this  
DLCI to the network.  
Display Conditions – This option is not available on a user data port.  
Low – Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority.  
Medium – Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.  
High – Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring PVC Connections  
The Auto-Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections  
and their DLCI Records. PVC Connections can also be created manually  
(see Table 3-10).  
Main Menu → Configuration → PVC Connections  
From this screen, you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by  
selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens.  
Quick removal of unused DLCIs included in an existing PVC Connection, except  
for HQ_Site, is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you  
respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated  
with the deleted PVC?prompt.  
Table 3-10. PVC Connection Options (1 of 2)  
Source Link  
Possible Settings: Port-1, Net1-FR1  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection; the from end of a  
from-to link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay  
interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC  
connection or management link. For example, if Port-1 has no DLCIs defined, Port-1  
would not appear as a valid setting.  
Port-1 – Specifies the user data port as the source link.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link.  
Clear All – Clears all Link and DLCI settings, and suppresses EDLCIs.  
Source DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be defined and  
cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed DLCIs, at least  
one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.  
NOTE: Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.  
Source EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for a frame  
relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a  
multiplexed DLCI record number.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-10. PVC Connection Options (2 of 2)  
Primary Destination Link  
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link; the to end of a  
from-to link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay  
interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC  
connection or management link. For example, if the network interface has no DLCIs  
defined, Net1-FR1 would not appear as a valid setting.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface as the destination link.  
Primary Destination DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be  
defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed  
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.  
NOTE: Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains  
no value.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.  
Primary Destination EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for  
a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a  
connection.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI  
contains a multiplexed DLCI record number.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Setting Up Management and Communication Options  
The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication  
menu:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Node IP Options  
Management PVC Options  
General SNMP Management Options  
Telnet and FTP Sessions Options  
SNMP NMS Security Options  
SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options  
Communication Port Options  
External Modem (COM Port) Options  
Configuring Node IP Information  
Select Node IP to display, add, or change the information necessary to support  
general IP communications for the node (see Table 3-11). When deploying units  
to remote sites, minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication → Node IP  
This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting (TS) Management  
Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their  
networks. This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link.  
Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations.  
No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the  
customer.  
TS_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models, but the link can be  
enabled at any time. Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard  
DLCI can be used. When enabled, a troubleshooting link can be accessed any  
time the service provider requests access. An assigned security level can also  
control access.  
When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link, the  
link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry  
screen with the This PVC has been designated as the TS  
Management Linkmessage.  
NOTE:  
The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already  
set up (e.g., 980).  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-11. Node IP Options (1 of 2)  
Node IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies the IP address needed to access the node. Since an IP address is not bound  
to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the node, which can be  
viewed or edited.  
Clear – Fills the node IP address with zeros.  
Node Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node. Since the subnet mask is not  
bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which can  
be viewed or edited.  
Clear – Fills the node subnet mask with zeros. When the node’s subnet mask is  
all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the  
IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C:  
255.255.255.000.  
Default IP Destination  
For models without an internal modem:  
Possible Settings: Default, COM, PVCname  
Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route.  
Examples:  
H If the default IP network is connected to the communications port, select COM.  
H If the default IP network is connected to a far-end device over the management PVC  
named London for the remote device located in the London office, select the PVC  
name London (as defined by the Name configuration option, Table 3-12,  
Management PVCs Options).  
NOTE: If the link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes  
disabled or down, the unrouteable data will be discarded. Make sure that  
the link selected is operational, and if that link goes down, change the  
default destination.  
CAUTION: Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a  
subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS, router, LAN  
adapter, terminal server, etc. is connected. Communicating with an  
unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops,  
which will last 16 iterations times the retry count.  
None – No default network destination is specified. Unrouteable data will be discarded.  
This is the recommended setting.  
COM – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port. Only  
appears when Port Use is set to Net Link (see Table 3-17, Communication Port  
Options).  
PVCname – Specifies a name for the management PVC. Only appears when a  
management PVC name is defined for the node. For example, when the network is  
connected to a remote device located in the London office, London can be specified as  
the PVC name, which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located  
in London. London would appear as one of the available selections.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-11. Node IP Options (2 of 2)  
TS Management Link  
Available Settings: None, PVCname  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service  
providers.  
If the option is changed from the management PVC name to None, the Delete the  
Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record?prompt  
appears. If you select:  
H No – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None.  
H Yes – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None, and the link  
and its DLCI will be deleted.  
None – Disables or does not specify a TS Management Link.  
PVCname – Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC.  
Display Conditions – This selection only appears when a dedicated Management  
PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set  
to Standard.  
TS Management Link Access Level  
Available Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3  
Default Setting: Level-1  
Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP  
session when the service provider is using the TS Management Link.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when TS Management Link is set  
to None.  
NOTES: Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level  
set by the Session Access Level, Login Required, or FTP Login Required  
option settings (see Table 3-14, Telnet and FTP Sessions).  
Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session,  
Inactivity Timeout, Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings.  
Level-1 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability  
to view unit information, change configuration options, and run tests. This is the highest  
access level allowed. Use this setting when downloading files.  
Level-2 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability  
to view unit information and run tests only; they cannot change configuration options.  
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view  
unit information only; they cannot change configuration options or run tests.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring Management PVCs  
Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or  
changing Management PVCs (see Table 3-12). First, DLCI records must have  
been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside. See  
Manually Configuring DLCI Records for additional information.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Management PVCs  
Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs.  
H
H
When you select New, the configuration option field is blank.  
When you select Modify, the values displayed for all fields are based on the  
PVC ID number that you specified.  
From this screen, you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting  
the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens.  
Select the Delete function key, a Management PVC ID#, and respond Yes to the  
Remove otherwise unused components associated with the  
deleted PVC?prompt for quick removal of unused DLCIs. If the Management  
PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination, a Default IP  
Destination, or a TS Management Link, an ... Are You Sure?prompt appears  
to warn you.  
Table 3-12. Management PVC Options (1 of 3)  
Name  
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens  
(e.g., Tpa for Tampa, Florida).  
ASCII Text Entry – Enter a unique name for the management PVC (maximum length  
8 characters).  
Intf IP Address  
Possible Settings: Node-IP-Address, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)  
Default Setting: Node-IP-Address  
Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC, providing  
connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network.  
Node-IP-Address – Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address (see  
Table 3-11, Node IP Options).  
Special (001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255) – Allows you to display/edit an IP  
address for the unit’s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is  
different from the node’s IP address.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-12. Management PVC Options (2 of 3)  
Intf Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: Node-Subnet-Mask, Calculate, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)  
Default Setting: Node-Subnet-Mask  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is  
providing connectivity to an external IP network (through frame relay) that requires a  
specific subnet mask for the interface.  
Node-Subnet-Mask – Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node-Subnet  
Mask configuration option (see Table 3-11, Node IP Options).  
Calculate – Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class  
of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or  
Class C: 255.255.255.000). Cannot be displayed or edited.  
Special (000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255) – Allows you to edit/display the subnet  
mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface. A  
text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit’s management  
PVC.  
Set DE  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether frames (packets) sent on a management PVC have the Discard  
Eligible (DE) bit set. This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard  
first during periods of network congestion. This allows management traffic to be viewed  
as lower priority than customer data.  
Enable – Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC.  
Disable – Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC. This is  
the recommended setting, particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service.  
Primary Link  
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1, Port-1, Clear  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC. The interface  
selected must have at least one DLCI (or DLCI with EDLCI) defined, which is not part of  
a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC.  
Net1-FR1 – Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection.  
Port-1 – Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the  
connection.  
Clear – Clears the link and the DLCI field, and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI  
was multiplexed.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-12. Management PVC Options (3 of 3)  
Primary DLCI  
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay  
interface is selected.  
The DLCI must be defined for the link (i.e., has a DLCI record), and it must not be part  
of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC. For multiplexed  
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI.  
NOTES: – DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank.  
– Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI.  
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).  
Primary EDLCI  
Possible Settings: 0 – 62  
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.  
Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is  
selected. EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCIs that are  
unique to those DLCIs.  
Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI.  
Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI. Use 1 – 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs. Use the  
primary EDLCI for customer data, which has a higher utilization rate than management  
data, with slightly less line overhead.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference  
a multiplexed DLCI.  
NOTE: Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI  
field.  
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number (inclusive).  
Primary Link RIP  
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary, Standard_out  
Default Setting:  
For multiplexed DLCIs: Proprietary  
For nonmultiplexed DLCIs: Standard_out  
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of  
management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment.  
None – Does not use a routing protocol.  
Proprietary – Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing  
information between FrameSaver units. A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of  
the link. This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed  
DLCIs (see Table 3-9, DLCI Record Options).  
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing  
information only about other FrameSaver SLV units in the network. This is the factory  
default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCIs.  
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the  
FrameSaver unit for the management interface (e.g., Cisco: config-t,  
router RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1,  
ctl-z WR). See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring General SNMP Management  
Select General SNMP Management to add, change, or delete the information  
needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the  
NMS supporting the SNMP protocols (see Table 3-13).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
Table 3-13. General SNMP Management Options  
SNMP Management  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an  
SNMP-compatible NMS.  
Enable – Can be managed as an SNMP agent.  
Disable – Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent. The FrameSaver unit will not  
respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps.  
Community Name 1  
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear  
Default Setting: Public in ASCII text field  
Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the  
FrameSaver unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP  
manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.  
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 1 (maximum 255 characters).  
Clear – Clears Community Name 1.  
Name 1 Access  
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write  
Default Setting: Read/Write  
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access  
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1.  
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects  
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.  
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).  
Community Name 2  
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear  
Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the  
FrameSaver unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP  
manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.  
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 2 (maximum 255 characters).  
Clear – Clears Community Name 2.  
Name 2 Access  
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write  
Default Setting: Read  
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access  
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2.  
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects  
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.  
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support  
Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP (File Transport Protocol)  
session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security  
applicable to the session. Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time  
(see Table 3-14).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Session  
When a TS Management Link has been set up and activated, the following  
options have no effect upon the PVC:  
H
H
H
Telnet Login Required  
Session Access Level  
FTP Login Required  
Table 3-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options (1 of 3)  
Telnet Session  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet  
client on an interconnected IP network.  
Enable – Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client.  
Disable – Does not allow Telnet sessions.  
Telnet Login Required  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) are required to  
access the menu-driven user interface via a Telnet session. If required, the login used is  
the same login used for an menu-driven user interface session. This option does not  
affect the TS Management Link.  
Enable – Requires a login to access a Telnet session.  
Disable – Does not require a login.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options (2 of 3)  
Session Access Level  
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3  
Default Setting: Level-1  
Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu-driven user  
interface via a Telnet session. If a login is required for the session, the effective access  
level is also determined by the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the  
effective access level is determined by this option. This option does not affect the TS  
Management Link.  
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the  
session or the user. For example, if the assigned Session Access Level is  
Level-2, but the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access is  
allowed for the session.  
Level-1 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with  
the capability to view system information, change configuration options, and run tests.  
This is the highest access level allowed.  
CAUTION: Before changing the session access level to Level-2 or 3, make sure that  
the COM port’s Port Access Level is set to Level-1 and that at least one  
Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this occurs,  
you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the  
configuration process again. A reset is required if the Communication  
Port’s Port Use option is set to Net Link (see Table 3-3, General System  
Options).  
Level-2 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with  
the capability to view system information and run tests only; they cannot change  
configuration options.  
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with  
the capability to view system information only; they cannot change configuration options  
or run tests.  
Inactivity Timeout  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of  
keyboard inactivity.  
Enable – Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires.  
Disable – Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options (3 of 3)  
Disconnect Time (Minutes)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 60  
Default Setting: 10  
Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is  
disconnected.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled.  
1 – 60 – Up to an hour can be set.  
FTP Session  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP (file transfer  
protocol) client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session. This option  
must be enabled when downloading files.  
Enable – Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client.  
Disable – Does not allow FTP sessions.  
FTP Login Required  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session. If required,  
the login used is the same login used for a menu-driven user interface session. This  
option does not affect the TS Management Link.  
Enable – User is prompted for a login ID and password.  
Disable – No login is required for an FTP session.  
FTP Max Receive Rate (kbps)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 1536  
Default Setting: 1536  
Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system. This option allows new  
software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without  
interfering with normal operation. Using this option, new software and configuration files  
can be downloaded quickly using the default settings, or at a slower rate over an  
extended period of time by selecting a slower speed. Based upon TCP flow control, the  
FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting.  
1 – 1536 – Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum  
management speed.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options  
Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to  
display, add, or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver  
unit to set up trap managers (see Table 3-15).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
SNMP NMS Security  
A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by  
IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP.  
Table 3-15. SNMP NMS Security Options  
NMS IP Validation  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP  
management systems attempting to access the node. Only allows access when the  
sending manager’s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen.  
Enable – Performs security checks.  
Disable – Does not perform security checks.  
Number of Managers  
Possible Settings: 1 – 10  
Default Setting: 1  
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send  
SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit. An IP address must be configured for each  
management system allowed to send messages. Configure IP addresses in the NMS n  
IP Address configuration option.  
1 – 10 – Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers.  
NMS n IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP  
messages to the unit. If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and  
its IP address cannot be matched here, access is denied and an authenticationFailure  
trap is generated. If a match is found, the type of access (read-only or read/write) is  
determined by the corresponding Access Type.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the NMS IP address.  
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.  
Access Type  
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write  
Default Setting: Read  
Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation  
is performed.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command) to the MIB objects. This  
includes all objects specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.  
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set commands) to the MIB  
objects. However, access for all read-only objects is specified as read-only.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out  
Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to  
configure SNMP traps and dial-out when a trap is generated (see Table 3-16).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
SNMP Traps  
See Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults, for trap  
format standards and special trap features, including RMON-specific traps, and  
the default settings that will generate RMON-specific SNMP traps.  
Table 3-16. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (1 of 4)  
SNMP Traps  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently  
configured SNMP trap manager(s).  
Enable – Sends trap messages.  
Disable – Does not send trap messages.  
Number of Trap Managers  
Possible Settings: 1 – 6  
Default Setting: 1  
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap  
messages from the FrameSaver unit. An NMS IP Address must be configured in the  
NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap  
messages.  
1 – 6 – Specifies the number of trap managers (inclusive).  
NMS n IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager(s) to receive SNMP traps.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap  
manager.  
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-16. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (2 of 4)  
Initial Route Destination  
Possible Settings: AutoRoute, COM, PVCname  
Default Setting: AutoRoute  
Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager. When proprietary  
RIP is active, only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management  
link as the initial destination. All other units can use the default setting.  
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the  
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.  
AutoRoute – Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route  
for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager, or the Default IP Destination when no  
route is available in the routing table (see Table 3-11, Node IP Options).  
COM – Uses the COM port. This selection is only available when Port Use is set to  
Net Link (see Table 3-17, Communication Port Options).  
PVCname – Uses the defined management linkname (the name given the Management  
PVC). This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for  
the node.  
General Traps  
Possible Settings: Disable, Warm, AuthFail, Both  
Default Setting: Both  
Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and/or authenticationFailure  
events are sent to the currently configured trap manager(s).  
Disable – Does not send trap messages for these events.  
Warm – Sends trap messages for warmStart events only.  
AuthFail – Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only.  
Both – Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events.  
Enterprise Specific Traps  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the  
currently configured trap manager(s).  
Enable – Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.  
Disable – Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.  
Link Traps  
Possible Settings: Disable, Up, Down, Both  
Default Setting: Both  
Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured  
trap manager(s). A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of  
the interfaces. A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces  
is active.  
Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to  
specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages.  
Disable – Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages.  
Up – Sends trap messages for linkUp events only.  
Down – Sends trap messages for linkDown events only.  
Both – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-16. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (3 of 4)  
Link Traps Interfaces  
Possible Settings: Network, DSX-1, T1s, Ports, All  
Default Setting: All  
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific trap  
messages. These traps are not supported on the COM port.  
Network – Generates these trap messages on the network interface only.  
DSX-1 – For applicable T1 FrameSaver units, generates these trap messages on the  
DSX-1 interface only.  
T1s – For applicable T1 FrameSaver units, generates these trap messages for linkUp,  
linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 network and DSX-1 interfaces.  
Ports – Generates these trap messages for linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific  
events on the user data port only.  
All – Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all  
interfaces, except for the COM port, that are applicable to the FrameSaver model.  
DLCI Traps on Interfaces  
Possible Settings: Network, Ports, All  
Default Setting: All  
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for  
individual DLCIs. These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces.  
Network – Generates these trap messages on DLCIs for the network interface only.  
Ports – Generates these trap messages for DLCIs on a user data port only.  
All – Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces.  
RMON Traps  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap  
manager(s). RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups  
of RMON1 when a selected variable’s configured threshold is exceeded.  
Enable – Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded.  
Disable – Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded.  
Trap Dial-Out  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically. If the call cannot be  
completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable, the SNMP trap message is held  
(queued) until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory.  
Enable – Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu’s Modem  
Call Directories, Directory Number A (Alarm).  
Disable – Automatic calls will not be initiated. Traps sent to the modem are held until a  
dial-in connection is established.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-16. SNMP Traps and Trap Dial-Out Options (4 of 4)  
Trap Disconnect  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether the COM port-connected modem disconnects after the SNMP trap  
message has been sent. This configuration option only applies to modem connections  
initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message.  
Enable – Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message(s).  
Disable – Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected  
manually or by the remote modem. This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for  
more information after receiving an SNMP trap.  
Call Retry  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Controls whether an incomplete call (busy, no answer, etc.) is retried when an SNMP  
trap message is sent to the COM port-connected external device.  
If an Alternate Dial-Out Directory is specified, the alarm directory’s telephone number is  
called first. If the call cannot be completed, then the alternate directory’s telephone  
number is called (see the Control menu’s Modem Call Directories).  
Enable – Attempts to retry the call, up to one time per SNMP trap message, with a  
delay between the retry. The delay is specified by the Dial-Out Delay Time (Min)  
configuration option.  
Disable – Does not retry an incomplete call.  
Dial-Out Delay TIme (Min)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 10  
Default Setting: 5  
Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent;  
the wait between call attempts (see Call Retry).  
1 – 10 – Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts  
(inclusive).  
Alternate Dial-Out Directory  
Possible Settings: None, 1 – 5  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies whether an incomplete call (busy, or no answer, etc.) resulting from an attempt  
to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number. Up to  
5 alternate call directories can be set up, but only one at a time can be used.  
When Call Retry is enabled, the alarm directory’s telephone number is called first. If the  
call cannot be completed after one additional try, then the specified alternate directory’s  
telephone number is called.  
None – Does not dial-out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers.  
1 – 5 – Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call  
cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory (Directory  
Number A in the Control menu’s Modem Call Directories).  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring the Communication Port  
Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to  
display or change the communication port configuration options (see Table 3-17).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Communication Port  
Table 3-17. Communication Port Options (1 of 4)  
Port Use  
Possible Settings: Terminal, Net Link  
Default Setting: Terminal  
Assigns a specific use to the COM port.  
NOTE: If the Default IP Destination is set to COM (see Table 3-11, Node IP  
Options) and you change Port Use to Terminal, the Default IP Destination  
is forced to None.  
Terminal – The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection.  
Net Link – The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or  
IP device port.  
Data Rate (Kbps)  
Possible Settings: 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2  
Default Setting: 19.2  
Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second.  
9.6 – 115.2 kbps – Sets the communication port speed.  
Character Length  
Possible Settings: 7, 8  
Default Setting: 8  
Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character.  
NOTE: Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to  
Net Link.  
7 – Sets the character length to seven bits.  
8 – Sets the character length to eight bits. Use this setting if using the COM port as the  
network communication link.  
Parity  
Possible Settings: None, Even, Odd  
Default Setting: None  
Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port. A  
parity bit is added to the data to make the “1” bits of each character add up to either an  
odd or even number. Each character of transmitted data is approved as error-free if the  
“1” bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option.  
None – Provides no parity.  
Even – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even.  
Odd – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-17. Communication Port Options (2 of 4)  
Stop Bits  
Possible Settings: 1, 2  
Default Setting: 1  
Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port.  
1 – Provides one stop bit.  
2 – Provides two stop bits.  
Ignore Control Leads  
Possible Settings: Disable, DTR  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies whether DTR is used.  
Disable – Treats control leads as standard operation.  
DTR – Ignores DTR. This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices.  
Login Required  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Disable  
Determines whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) is required in  
order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Enable – Requires a login to access the menu-driven user interface.  
Disable – Does not requires a login.  
Port Access Level  
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3  
Default Setting: Level-1  
Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the  
COM port. If a login is required for the port, the effective access level is determined by  
the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the effective access level is  
determined by this option.  
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the  
port or the user. For example, if the Port Access Level assigned is Level-2,  
but the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access will be  
permitted for the port.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Level-1 – Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring, diagnostics,  
and configuration. The user can add, change, and display configuration options, and  
perform device testing.  
CAUTION: Before changing the communication port’s access level to Level-2 or 3,  
make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level-1 and at  
least one Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this  
occurs, you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the  
configuration process again.  
Level-2 – Allows limited access and control of the device. The user can monitor and  
perform diagnostics, display status and configuration option information.  
Level-3 – Allows limited access with monitoring control only. The user can monitor and  
display status and configuration screens only.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-17. Communication Port Options (3 of 4)  
Inactivity Timeout  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity  
(no keyboard activity).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
Enable – Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity.  
Disable – Does not disconnect user session.  
Disconnect Time (Minutes)  
Possible Settings: 1 – 60  
Default Setting: 10  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is  
disconnected.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.  
1 – 60 – Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes (inclusive).  
IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port. Only in effect  
when the COM port is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is  
set to Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the COM port, which  
you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros. When  
the IP Address is all zeros, the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been  
configured.  
Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit. Only in effect when the COM port  
is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the COM port, which  
you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros. When  
the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based  
upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000,  
or Class C: 255.255.255.000.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-17. Communication Port Options (4 of 4)  
Link Protocol  
Possible Settings: PPP, SLIP  
Default Setting: PPP  
Specifies the link-layer protocol to be used. Only in effect when the COM port is  
configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to Net Link).  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
PPP – Point-to-Point Protocol.  
SLIP – Serial-Line Internet Protocol.  
RIP  
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary, Standard_out  
Default Setting: None  
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of  
management data between devices.  
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.  
None – No routing is used.  
Proprietary – A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing  
information only between devices to enable routing of IP traffic.  
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing  
information about other FrameSaver units in the network. Standard RIP messages  
received on this link are ignored.  
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing  
information about other FrameSaver units in the network. Standard RIP messages  
received on this link are ignored.  
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the  
COM port, configured as the management interface (e.g., Cisco:  
config-t, router RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive  
version 1, ctl-z WR).  
To create this management interface, make sure that Node or COM port IP  
Information has been set up (Configuring Node IP Information).  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem  
Select External Modem (Com Port) to display or change the configuration options  
that control call processing for an external device attached to the COM port  
(see Table 3-18).  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
External Modem (Com Port)  
NOTE:  
A standard EIA-232 crossover cable is required when connecting an external  
modem to the FrameSaver unit’s COM port. See Standard EIA-232-D  
Crossover Cable in Appendix C, Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments,  
for cable pin assignments.  
Table 3-18. External Modem (COM Port) Options (1 of 2)  
External Modem Commands  
Possible Settings: Disable, AT  
Default Setting: Disable  
Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port.  
Disable – Commands will not be sent over the COM port.  
AT – Standard Attention (AT) Commands are sent over the COM port to control the  
external device. All AT command strings will end with a carriage return (hex 0x0D) and a  
line feed (hex 0x0A).  
CAUTION: Do not use this setting if you have an asynchronous terminal connected  
to the COM port.  
Dial-In Access  
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable  
Default Setting: Enable  
Controls whether external devices can dial-in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM  
port (based on the Port Use option setting).  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is  
disabled.  
Enable – Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or  
IP network.  
Disable – Does not answer incoming calls.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Table 3-18. External Modem (COM Port) Options (2 of 2)  
Alternate IP Address  
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)  
Specifies the Alternate IP Address for the COM port when the alternate phone directory  
is used. If this configuration option is not configured (i.e., it is zero), the COM port’s  
primary IP Address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is  
set to AT. Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network  
communication link (Port Use is set to Net Link, see Table 3-17, Communication Port  
Options).  
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the COM port’s Alternate IP Address,  
which you can view or edit. The first byte (i.e., nnn.255.255.255) can be any number  
from 001 through 223, excluding 127. Remaining bytes (i.e., 223.nnn.nnn.nnn) can be  
any number from 000 through 255. Leading zeros are required.  
Clear – Clears the Alternate IP Address for the COM port and fills the address with  
zeros (i.e., 000.000.000.000).  
Alternate Subnet Mask  
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear  
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000  
Specifies the Alternate Subnet Mask for the COM port when the alternate phone  
directory is used.  
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is  
set to AT. Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network  
communication link (Port Use is set to Net Link, see Table 3-17, Communication Port  
Options).  
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the COM port, which  
you can view or edit.  
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros  
(i.e., 000.000.000.000). When the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates  
a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address:  
Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
4
This chapter includes the following:  
H
H
H
H
Limiting Access  
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access  
Controlling External COM Port Device Access  
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access  
— Limiting Telnet Access  
— Limiting FTP Access  
— Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link  
Controlling SNMP Access  
H
— Disabling SNMP Access  
— Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels  
— Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses  
Creating a Login  
H
H
H
Modifying a Login  
Deleting a Login  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting Access  
The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces:  
H
H
H
H
Asynchronous (async) terminal  
Telnet  
FTP  
SNMP  
Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time; that is, you  
can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions, or one Telnet session and one active  
asynchronous terminal session, or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal  
sessions.  
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access  
Direct asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface can be  
limited by:  
H
H
Requiring a login.  
Assigning an access level to the port or interface.  
See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 3, Configuration, for  
more information about communication (COM) port configuration options.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
" Procedure  
To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface:  
1. Select the Communication Port options.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Communication Port  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Require a login  
Login Required to Enable.  
NOTE: User ID and password combinations  
must be defined. See Creating a Login.  
Limit the effective access level to  
Level-3 or Level-2  
Port Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.  
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access  
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher  
than the access level specified for the port  
(e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and Level-2  
port access has been set, the Level-1 user  
can only operate as a Level-2 user).  
If you are going to allow Level-1 users to  
configure the unit, keep the access at Level-1.  
NOTE:  
See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 ,  
Troubleshooting, should you be locked out inadvertently.  
3. Save your changes.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Controlling External COM Port Device Access  
Dial-in access can be controlled when an external device (modem) is connected  
to the unit’s communication (COM) port. The External Device Commands option  
must be set to AT or Other.  
" Procedure  
To control dial-in access:  
1. Select the External Modem options.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
External Modem (Com Port)  
2. Enable the Dial-In Access configuration option.  
This option only appears when the External Device Commands option is set  
to AT or Other.  
3. Save your change.  
See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem in Chapter 3,  
Configuration, for more information about external device communication port  
configuration options.  
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access  
The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or  
FTP session. Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on  
a service provider’s troubleshooting (TS) management link.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting Telnet Access  
Telnet access can be limited by:  
H
H
Disabling Telnet access completely.  
Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Management  
Link.  
H
H
Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions.  
Disabling TS Management Link access.  
To limit Telnet access via a service provider’s troubleshooting management link,  
see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link.  
" Procedure  
To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link:  
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Sessions  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Telnet Session to Disable.  
Login Required to Enable.  
Disable Telnet access  
Require a login  
NOTE: User ID and password combinations  
must be defined. See Creating a Login.  
Assign an access level  
Session Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.  
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access  
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher  
than the access level specified for the Telnet  
session (e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and  
Level-2 telnet access has been set, the  
Level-1 user can only operate as a Level-2  
user).  
If you are going to allow users to configure the  
unit, keep the access at Level-1.  
3. Save your changes.  
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3, Configuration,  
for more information about setting Telnet configuration options.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting FTP Access  
FTP access can be limited by:  
H
H
H
Disabling FTP access completely.  
Requiring a user ID and password to login.  
Limiting FTP bandwidth.  
" Procedure  
To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link:  
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Sessions  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
FTP Session to Disable.  
Disable FTP  
Require a login  
Login Required to Enable.  
NOTE: User ID and password combinations  
must be defined. See Creating a Login.  
If you want to allow users to configure the unit  
or perform file transfers, including downloads,  
keep the access at Level-1.  
Level-1 access is required to download  
software to the unit, or to upload or download  
configuration files. Level-3 is sufficient for  
NMS access for SLV historical information.  
Limit bandwidth for FTP  
FTP Max Receive Rate to a rate less than the  
network line speed, typically less than or  
equal to the CIR.  
This method is not recommended if SLV  
reports are desired since FTP is required to  
generate the reports.  
3. Save your changes.  
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3, Configuration,  
for more information about setting FTP configuration options.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link  
" Procedure  
To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link:  
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Telnet and FTP Sessions  
2. Disable Telnet Session and/or FTP Session, as appropriate.  
3. Return to the Management and Communication menu, and select Node IP.  
4. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Disable access via a  
TS Management Link  
TS Management Link to None.  
Assign an access level to the  
TS Management Link  
TS Management Access Level to Level-2  
or Level-3.  
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access  
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher  
than the access level specified for the session  
(e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and Level-2  
telnet access has been set, the Level-1 user  
can only operate as a Level-2 user).  
If you are going to allow users to configure the  
unit, keep the access at Level-1.  
5. Save your changes.  
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP  
Information in Chapter 3, Configuration, for more information about these  
configuration options.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Controlling SNMP Access  
The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1, which provides limited security  
through the use of community names. There are three methods for limiting SNMP  
access:  
H
H
H
Disabling SNMP access.  
Assigning SNMP community names and the access type.  
Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit.  
Disabling SNMP Access  
When the SNMP access is disabled, the FrameSaver unit will not respond to  
SNMP messages.  
" Procedure  
To disable SNMP access:  
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
2. Disable the SNMP Management option.  
3. Save your change.  
See Configuring SNMP Management in Chapter 3, Configuration, for more  
information about General SNMP Management configuration options.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels  
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an  
SNMP manager. SNMP manager access can be limited by:  
H
H
Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the  
FrameSaver unit’s Management Information Base (MIB).  
Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name.  
Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB, the  
community name must be supplied.  
" Procedure  
To assign SNMP community names and access types:  
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management  
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Assign SNMP community names  
Community Name 1 and Community Name 2  
to a community name text, up to 255  
characters in length.  
Assign the type of access allowed  
for the SNMP community names  
Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read  
or Read/Write.  
3. Save your changes.  
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3, Configuration, for  
more information about General SNMP Management configuration options.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses  
An additional level of security is provided by:  
H
H
Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit.  
Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management  
systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit.  
H
Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address  
validation is performed.  
The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that  
determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP  
management systems attempting to communicate with the unit.  
Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable.  
Menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
General SNMP Management → SNMP Management: Enable  
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3, Configuration, for  
more information about SNMP management configuration options.  
" Procedure  
To limit SNMP access through IP addresses:  
1. Select the SNMP NMS Security options:  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
SNMP NMS Security  
2. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
To . . .  
Set the configuration option . . .  
Enable IP address checking  
NMS IP Validation to Enable.  
Specify the number (between 1  
and 10) of SNMP management  
systems that are authorized to  
send SNMP messages to the  
FrameSaver unit  
Number of Managers to the desired  
number.  
Specify the IP address(es) that  
identifies the SNMP manager(s)  
authorized to send SNMP  
messages to the unit  
NMS n IP Address to the appropriate  
IP address.  
Specify the access allowed for an  
authorized NMS when IP address  
validates is performed  
Access Level to Read or Read/Write.  
3. Save your changes.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3, Configuration, for  
more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options.  
Creating a Login  
A login is required if security is enabled.* Up to six login ID/password  
combinations can be created using ASCII text, and each login must have a  
specified access level. Logins must be unique and they are case-sensitive.  
" Procedure  
To create a login record:  
1. Select Administer Logins.  
Main Menu → Control → Administer Logins  
2. Select New, and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.  
In the field . . .  
Login ID  
Enter the . . .  
ID of 1 to 10 characters.  
Password from 1 to 10 characters.  
Password  
Re-enter password  
Password again to verify that you entered the  
correct password into the device.  
Access Level  
Access level: 1, 2, or 3.  
H Level-1 – User can add, change, and  
display configuration options, save, and  
perform device testing.  
H Level-2 – User can monitor and perform  
diagnostics, display status and  
configuration option information.  
H Level-3 – User can only monitor and  
display status and configuration screens.  
CAUTION: Make sure at least one login is set  
up for Level-1 access or you may be  
inadvertently locked out.  
NOTE:  
See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6,  
Troubleshooting, should you be locked out inadvertently.  
3. Save your changes.  
When Save is complete, the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field, ready  
for another entry.  
* Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the communication port, modem port, and  
Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Security and Logins  
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3, Configuration, for  
more information about security configuration options.  
Modifying a Login  
Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one.  
Deleting a Login  
" Procedure  
To delete a login record:  
1. Select Administer Logins.  
Main Menu → Control → Administer Logins  
2. Page through login pages/records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys  
until the login to be deleted is displayed.  
3. Select Delete.  
4. Save your deletion.  
When the deletion is complete, the number of login pages/records reflects  
one less record, and the record before the deleted record reappears.  
Example:  
Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
5
This chapter includes the following information:  
H
H
Displaying System Information  
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads  
— LED Descriptions  
— Control Lead Descriptions  
Device Messages  
H
H
Status Information  
— System and Test Status Messages, which includes:  
Self-Test Results Messages  
Health and Status Messages  
Test Status Messages  
— Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status  
— PVC Connection Status  
— Time Slot Assignment Status, which includes:  
Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments  
Displaying DSX-1 Time Slot Assignments  
H
Performance Statistics  
— Clearing Performance Statistics  
— Service Level Verification Performance Statistics  
— DLCI Performance Statistics  
— Frame Relay Performance Statistics  
— ESF Line Performance Statistics  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
H
FTP File Transfers  
— Upgrading System Software  
— Determining Whether a Download is Completed  
— Changing Software  
— Transferring Collected Data  
Displaying System Information  
Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver  
unit. This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement  
units and/or making firmware upgrades.  
Main Menu → Status → Identity  
View this field . . .  
To find the . . .  
System Name  
Domain name for this SNMP-managed node (up to  
255 ASCII characters).  
System Contact  
System Location  
NAM  
Contact person for this SNMP-managed node.  
Physical location for this SNMP-managed node.  
NAM Type  
Type of unit installed, referred to as a network access  
module, or NAM (i.e., T1 FR NAM). This card type is  
supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object.  
Serial Number  
Unit’s 7-character serial number.  
Current Software Revision  
Software version currently being used by the unit.  
Format nn.nn.nn consists of a 6-digit number that  
represents the major and minor revision levels.  
Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit,  
but has not yet been implemented. Format is the same as  
for the Current Software Revision.  
H In Progressindicates that the flash memory is  
currently being downloaded.  
H Invalidindicates that no download has occurred or  
the download was not successful  
Hardware Revision  
Unit’s hardware version. Format nnnn-nnx consists of a  
4-digit number, followed by two digits and one alphabetic  
character.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads  
The FrameSaver 9124 unit’s faceplate includes LEDs (light-emitting diodes) that  
provide status on the unit and its interfaces.  
9124  
SIG  
OOF ALM  
SIG  
OOF ALM  
OK  
ALM  
TST  
OK  
®
FrameSaver SLV  
NETWORK  
DSX  
PORT  
99-15821-02  
The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit  
and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems. The appropriate  
interfaces are shown on this screen, with the appropriate status highlighted.  
Main Menu → Status → Display LEDs and Control Leads  
Display LEDs & Control Leads Screen  
main/status/leds  
9124-II  
Device Name: Node A  
5/26/1999 23:32  
DISPLAY LEDS & CONTROL LEADS  
GENERAL  
NETWORK1  
DSX-1  
PORT-1  
OK  
Alarm  
Test  
Sig  
OOF  
Alm  
Sig  
OOF  
Alm  
OK  
TXD  
RXD  
DTR  
CTS  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh  
Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions. LED and control lead  
descriptions are in the sections that follow.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
LED Descriptions  
The following table identifies the alarms that cause the Alarm LED to light. See  
Table 5-2 and Table 5-3 for network, DSX-1, and user data port interface LED  
information.  
Table 5-1. General Status LEDs  
Label  
Indication  
Color  
What It Means  
OK  
Power and  
Operational  
Status  
Green  
ON – FrameSaver unit has power and it is  
operational.  
OFF – FrameSaver unit is in a power-on  
self-test, or there is a failure.  
ALM  
Operational  
Alarm (Fail)  
Red  
ON – FrameSaver unit has just been reset,  
or an error or fault has been detected.  
Error/fault/alarm conditions:  
H Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)  
H CTS Down  
H DLCI Down  
H DTR Down  
H Exceeded Error Rate (EER)  
H LMI Down  
H Loss of Signal (LOS)  
H Network Communication Link Down  
H Out of Frame (OOF)  
H Power Supply Failure  
H Primary or Secondary Clock Failed  
H Self-Test Failed  
H SLV Timeout  
H Two Level-1 Users Accessing  
Device  
H Yellow Alarm Signal  
OFF – No failures have been detected.  
These alarms appear on the System and  
Test Status screen. See Health and Status  
Messages for additional information.  
TST  
Test Mode  
Yellow  
ON – Loopback or test pattern is in progress,  
initiated locally, remotely, or from the  
network.  
OFF – No tests are active.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-2. Network and DSX-1 Interface LEDs  
Label  
Indication  
Color  
What It Means  
SIG  
Signal  
Green  
ON – A recoverable signal is present on the  
Network/DSX interface.  
OFF – The signal cannot be recovered from  
the Network/DSX interface. An LOS  
condition exists.  
OOF  
ALM  
Out of Frame  
Alarm  
Yellow  
Yellow  
ON – At least one OOF was detected during  
the sampling period.  
OFF – No OOFs were detected during the  
sampling period.  
ON – An alarm condition is present on the  
network/DSX interface.  
Current alarm conditions:  
H Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)  
H Excessive Error Rate (EER)  
H Loss of Signal (LOS)  
H Loss of Frame (LOF)  
H Out of Frame (OOF)  
H Yellow Alarm Signal  
OFF – No alarm condition is present on the  
Network/DSX interface.  
Table 5-3. User Data Port LED  
Label  
Indication  
Color  
What It Means  
OK  
Operational  
Status  
Green  
ON – The interchange circuits for the port  
are in the correct state to transmit and  
receive data.  
OFF – The port is idle. Occurs if the port is  
disabled, or if the port is configured to  
monitor DTR and/or RTS and the  
lead(s) is not asserted.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Control Lead Descriptions  
For the network and DSX-1 interfaces, see Table 5-2, Network and DSX-1  
Interface LEDs, for descriptions of these leads. The LED descriptions and control  
lead descriptions are the same.  
For Port-1, see Table 5-4, User Data Port LED. These indicators show the current  
state of each control lead and what they indicate when they are highlighted; that  
is, in the On state.  
Table 5-4. User Data Port Control Leads  
Label  
Indication  
What It Means  
OK  
Operational Status  
The user data port is operational, able to  
transmit and receive data.  
TXD  
RXD  
DTR  
Transmit Data  
Data is being sent to the far end device.  
Receive Data  
Data is being received from the far end device.  
Data Terminal Ready  
Shows the current state of the DTR control  
lead. This indicator should always be on.  
CTS  
Clear to Send  
Shows the current state of the CTS control  
lead. This indicator should always be on.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Device Messages  
These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens.  
All device messages are listed in alphabetical order.  
Table 5-5. Device Messages (1 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Access level is n,  
Read-only.  
User’s access level is 2  
or 3; user is not authorized  
to change configurations.  
No action needed.  
Already Active  
Test selected is already  
running.  
H Allow test to continue.  
H Select another test.  
H Stop the test.  
Blank Entries  
Removed  
New had been selected  
from the Administer Logins  
screen, no entry was made,  
then Save was selected.  
H No action needed.  
H Reenter the Login ID,  
Password, and Access Level.  
Cannot delete Trap  
Manager  
Delete was selected from  
the Management PVCs  
Options screen, but the  
PVC had been defined as a  
trap destination.  
No action needed, or configure  
another path for traps and try  
again.  
Command Complete  
Connection Refused  
Configuration has been  
saved or all tests have  
been aborted.  
No action needed.  
Wait and try again.  
Two menu-driven user  
interface sessions are  
already in use when a  
Telnet session was  
attempted.  
(Seen at an FTP  
terminal.)  
Destination Not  
Unique  
Destination entered is  
already being used.  
Enter another destination  
indicator.  
DLCI in connection.  
Delete connection first that was part of a  
User tried to delete a DLCI  
H No action needed, or  
H Delete the connection, then  
connection.  
delete the DLCI.  
Duplicate DLCI  
Number  
DLCI number entered is not No action needed; previous  
unique for the frame relay  
contents of the DLCI number  
field is restored.  
link.  
File Transfer Complete A file transfer was  
Switch to the newly downloaded  
software.  
performed successfully.  
(Seen at an FTP  
terminal.)  
See Changing Software.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-5. Device Messages (2 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
File Transfer Failed –  
Invalid file  
A file transfer was  
attempted, but it was not  
successful.  
H Try again, making sure you  
type the filename correctly.  
(Seen at an FTP  
terminal.)  
H Exit the FTP session, or  
download another file.  
See Changing Software.  
Invalid Character (x)  
A non-valid printable ASCII Reenter information using valid  
character has been  
characters.  
entered.  
Invalid date: must be  
mm/dd/yyyy  
A non-valid date was  
entered on the System  
Information screen.  
Reenter the date in the  
month/day/4-digit year format.  
Invalid date and/or  
time  
A non-valid date or time  
was entered on the System month/day/4-digit year format  
Information screen. The  
date does not exist (e.g.,  
February 30th).  
Reenter the date in the  
and/or time in the  
hour:minutes:seconds format.  
Invalid time: must be  
hh:mm:ss  
A non-valid system time  
was entered on the System hour:minutes:seconds format.  
Information screen.  
Reenter the time in the  
Invalid – Already  
Active  
A test was already in  
progress when it was  
selected.  
No action needed.  
Invalid Password  
Login is required and an  
incorrect password was  
entered; access is denied.  
H Try again.  
H Contact your system  
administrator to verify your  
password.  
Invalid Test  
Combination  
A conflicting loopback or  
pattern test was in progress  
when Start was selected to  
start another test, or was  
active on the same or  
H Wait until other test ends and  
message clears.  
H Cancel all tests from the Test  
screen (Path: main/test).  
another interface when  
Start was selected.  
H Stop the test from the same  
screen the test was started  
from.  
Limit of six Login IDs  
reached  
An attempt to enter a new  
login ID was made, and the  
limit of six login/password  
combinations has been  
reached.  
H Delete another login/password  
combination.  
H Reenter the new login ID.  
Limit of Mgmt PVCs  
reached  
New was selected from the H Do not create the  
PVC Connection Table and  
the maximum number of  
management PVCs has  
already been created.  
management PVC.  
H Delete another management  
PVC, and try again.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-5. Device Messages (3 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Limit of PVC  
Connections reached  
New was selected from the H Do not create the PVC  
PVC Connection Table and  
the maximum number of  
PVCs has already been  
created.  
connection.  
H Delete another PVC  
connection, and try again.  
Name Must be Unique Name entered for a  
management PVC has  
Enter another 4-character name  
for the logical/management link.  
been used previously.  
No Destination Link  
DLCIs Available  
New was selected from the Configure additional DLCIs for  
PVC Connection Table, but the network link and try again.  
even though DLCIs are  
available to form a  
connection, no DLCIs are  
available on the network  
link, which is a suitable  
PVC Destination.  
No DLCIs available for New was selected from the No action needed, or configure  
connection  
PVC Connection Table, but more DLCIs and try again.  
all configured DLCIs have  
been connected.  
No DLCIs available for New was selected from the Configure more network and/or  
connection  
Management PVCs option  
screen, but all Link/DLCI  
pairs have been connected.  
Port-1 Links/DLCIs pairs and try  
again.  
No DLCIs Available for New was selected from the Configure more network and/or  
Mgmt PVC  
Management PVCs option  
screen, but all configured  
DLCIs have been  
Port-1 DLCIs and try again.  
connected.  
No DLCIs Defined  
DLCI Records was selected Select New and create a DLCI  
from an interface’s  
record.  
Configuration Edit/Display  
menu, and no DLCI  
Records have been created  
for this interface.  
No more DLCIs  
allowed  
New or CopyFrom was  
selected from an interface’s new DLCI Record.  
DLCI Records configuration  
Delete a DLCI, then create the  
screen, and the maximum  
number of DLCI Records  
had already been reached.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-5. Device Messages (4 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
No Primary  
Destination Link  
DLCIs Available  
New or Modify was  
Configure additional DLCIs for  
the network link and try again.  
selected from the PVC  
Connection Table, but even  
though DLCIs are available  
to form a connection, no  
DLCIs are available on the  
network link, which is a  
suitable Primary PVC  
Destination.  
If a network DLCI has been  
entered as a Source DLCI:  
1. Change the Source DLCI to a  
user data port DLCI.  
2. Enter the network DLCI as the  
PVC’s Primary Destination.  
No Security Records  
to Delete  
Delete was selected from  
the Administer Login  
screen, and no security  
records had been defined.  
H No action needed.  
H Enter a security record.  
Password Matching  
Error – Re-enter  
Password  
Password entered in the  
Re-enter Password field of  
the Administer Logins  
screen does not match  
what was entered in the  
Password field.  
H Try again.  
H Contact your system  
administrator to verify your  
password.  
Permission Denied  
A file transfer was  
attempted, but the:  
(Seen at an FTP  
terminal.)  
H User did not have  
H See your system administrator  
to get your security level  
changed.  
Level 1 security.  
H Wrong file was specified H Try again, entering the correct  
when the put command  
file with the put command.  
was entered.  
H User attempted to  
upload a program file  
from the unit.  
H Enter the put command  
instead of a get command;  
you can only transfer files to  
the unit, not from it.  
See Upgrading System  
Software.  
Please Wait  
Command takes longer  
than 5 seconds.  
Wait until message clears.  
Resetting Device,  
Please Wait ...  
Yes (or y) was entered in  
the Reset COM Port usage  
field of the System Paused  
menu.  
No action needed.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-5. Device Messages (5 of 5)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Test Active  
No higher priority health  
and status messages exist,  
and a test is running.  
H Contact service provider if test  
initiated by the network.  
H Wait until the test ends and  
message clears.  
H Cancel all tests from the Test  
screen (Path: main/test).  
H Stop the test from the same  
screen the test was started  
from.  
User Interface  
Already in Use  
Two Telnet sessions are  
already in use when an  
attempt to access the  
menu-driven user interface  
through the COM port is  
made.  
H Wait and try again.  
H Contact one of the IP address  
user and request that they log  
off.  
IP addresses and logins of  
the users currently  
accessing the interface are  
also provided.  
User Interface Idle  
Value Out of Range  
Previously active session is Log on to the FrameSaver unit.  
now closed/ended, and  
access via the COM port is  
now available.  
Session has been ended  
due to timeout.  
No action needed.  
CIR entered for the DLCI is Enter a valid CIR (0 – 1536000).  
a number greater than the  
maximum allowed.  
Excess Burst Size entered  
for the DLCI is a number  
greater than the maximum  
allowed.  
Enter a valid Excess Burst Size  
(0 – 1536000).  
DLCI Number entered is  
less than 16 or greater  
than 1007.  
Enter a valid number  
(16 – 1007).  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
Status Information  
Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit. The following  
illustration shows the Status menu for the FrameSaver 9124 unit.  
Status Menu  
main/status  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
5/26/1999 23:32  
STATUS  
System and Test Status  
LMI Reported DLCIs  
PVC Connection Status  
Network Interface Status  
Time Slot Assignment Status  
Performance Statistics  
Display LEDs and Control Leads  
Identity  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
NOTE:  
Status messages contained in the following sections are in  
alphabetical order.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
System and Test Status Messages  
System and test status information is selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status  
The following information is included on this screen:  
H
H
H
Self-Test Results Messages  
Health and Status Messages  
Test Status Messages  
Self-Test Results Messages  
These self-test result messages appear in the Self-Test Results field at the top of  
the System and Test Status screen.  
Table 5-6. Self-Test Results Messages  
Message  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Failure xxxxxxxx  
An internal failure occurred 1. Record the failure code.  
(xxxxxxxx represents an  
2. Reset the unit.  
8-digit hexadecimal failure  
code used by service  
personnel).  
3. Contact your service  
representative.  
Record the failure code  
before resetting the unit;  
otherwise, the error  
information will be lost.  
Passed  
No problems were found  
during power-on or reset.  
No action needed.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Health and Status Messages  
The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the  
FrameSaver 9124 unit.  
Table 5-7. Health and Status Messages (1 of 4)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
AIS at DSX-1  
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is received by the  
DSX-1 interface. AIS is an unframed, all ones  
signal.  
AIS at Network 1  
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is received by the  
network interface. AIS is an unframed, all ones  
signal. Possible reasons include:  
H Upstream FrameSaver unit is transmitting AIS  
(keep-alive signal).  
H The network is transmitting an AIS.  
Auto-Configuration Active  
Back-to-Back Mode Active  
Auto-Configuration feature is active, which allows  
automatic configuration and cross-connection of  
DLCIs as they are reported by the network LMI.  
The operating mode has been configured for  
back-to-back operation (Main Menu → Control →  
Change Operating Mode).  
The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another  
FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch  
between them.  
This feature is useful for product demonstrations  
or for a point-to-point configuration using a leased  
line.  
CTS down to Port-1 Device  
The user data port CTS control lead on the  
FrameSaver unit is off.  
DLCI nnnn Down,  
frame relay link  
The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down.  
1,2  
DTR Down from Port-1 Device  
The DTR control lead from the device connected to  
the user data port is deasserted.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-7. Health and Status Messages (2 of 4)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
EER at Network 1  
The error rate of the received network signal  
exceeds the currently configured threshold. This  
condition only occurs if the network interface is  
configured for ESF framing.  
This condition clears when the error rate falls  
below the threshold value, which may take up to  
15 minutes.  
Link Down Administratively,  
frame relay link  
The specified frame relay link has been disabled  
by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI  
Protocol on another link is in a failed state.  
2
This is not an alarm condition so System  
Operationalappears, as well.  
LMI Discovery in Progress,  
frame relay link  
Local Management Interface protocol discovery is  
in progress to determine which protocol will be  
used on the specified frame relay link.  
2
2
LMI Down, frame relay link  
The Local Management Interface(s) has been  
declared down for the specified frame relay link.  
LOS at DSX-1  
A Loss of Signal (LOS) condition is detected on the  
DSX-1 interface. Clears when the ratio of ones to  
zeros received is greater than or equal to 12.5%.  
Possible reasons include:  
H DSX-1 cable problem.  
H No signal being transmitted from the DTE.  
LOS at Network 1  
A Loss of Signal (LOS) condition is detected on the  
network interface. Clears when the ratio of ones to  
zeros received is greater than or equal to 12.5%.  
Possible reasons include:  
H Network cable problem.  
H No signal is being transmitted at the far-end  
FrameSaver unit.  
H T1 facility problem.  
Network Com Link Down  
OOF at DSX-1  
The communication link for the COM port is down,  
and the COM port is configured for Net Link.  
An Out of Frame (OOF) condition is detected on  
the DSX-1 interface. Possible reasons include:  
H Incompatible framing format between the DTE  
and the FrameSaver unit.  
H DSX-1 cabling problem.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-7. Health and Status Messages (3 of 4)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
OOF at Network 1  
An Out of Frame (OOF) condition is detected on  
the network interface. Possible reasons include:  
H Incompatible framing format between the  
network and the FrameSaver unit.  
H Network cabling problem.  
H T1 facility problem.  
Primary Clock Failed  
A failure of the primary clock source configured for  
the unit is detected and the secondary clock is  
providing the timing for the unit.  
This condition clears when the configured primary  
clock is restored.  
Primary & Secondary Clocks  
Failed  
A failure of the primary and secondary clock  
sources configured for the unit are detected and  
the internal clock is providing timing for the unit.  
The clock source will not automatically switch from  
internal until the primary clock source returns.  
Secondary Clock Failed  
A failure of the secondary clock source configured  
for the unit is detected and the internal clock is  
providing the timing for the unit.  
The clock source will not automatically switch from  
internal until the primary clock source returns.  
SLV Timeout, DLCI nnnn,  
frame relay link  
An excessive number of SLV communication  
responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit  
have been missed on the specified multiplexed  
DLCI; the DLCI is not suitable for user data.  
1, 2, 3  
When a hardware bypass capable device has  
been detected at the other end of the PVC and this  
condition occurs, only user data for EDLCI 0 will be  
transmitted while this condition exists.  
Two Level-1 Users Accessing  
Device  
Two Level 1 users are already using the menu-  
driven user interface; only two sessions can be  
active at one time.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
3
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-7. Health and Status Messages (4 of 4)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
Time Slot Discovery in Progress,  
Network 1  
Time slot discovery is currently taking place to  
determine the time slots that will be used for frame  
relay traffic on the network interface.  
This message only appears when the Time Slot  
Discovery option is enabled (Main Menu →  
Configuration → Time Slot Assignment → Frame  
Relay Network Assignments) and an LMI failure is  
detected on the network interface’s frame relay  
link.  
Yellow at DSX-1  
A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX-1  
interface. DTE has detected a LOS or OOF  
condition.  
Yellow at Network 1  
A yellow alarm signal is received on the network  
interface. Possible reasons include:  
H Network cable problem.  
H T1 facility problem.  
Test Status Messages  
These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status  
screen. You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test.  
See Chapter 6, Troubleshooting, for more information on tests, including how to  
start and stop them.  
Table 5-8. Test Status Messages (1 of 2)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
DCLB Active, [Net1-FR1/Port-1]  
A Data Channel V.54 Loopback (DCLB) is active  
on the T1 network frame relay link, or on the data  
for the user data port.  
DTE External LB Active, Port-1  
DTE Init. Ext LB Active, Port-1  
DTPLB Active, Port-1  
An external DTE Loopback is running on the user  
data port.  
The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback  
on the user data port.  
A Data Terminal Payload Loopback (DTPLB) is  
active for the specified slot and port.  
Lamp Test Active  
The Lamp Test is active, causing the LEDs on the  
faceplate to flash on and off.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-8. Test Status Messages (2 of 2)  
Message  
What It Indicates  
LLB Active, [Network 1/DSX-1]  
A network Line Loopback (LLB) is active on the  
specified interface.  
Monitor Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,  
frame_relay_link  
The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the  
specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link.  
1,2  
Monitor Pttn Active, [Interface]  
A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified  
interface.  
This test cannot be activated on user data ports  
that have Port Use set to Frame Relay.  
No Test Active  
No tests are currently running.  
PLB Active, [Network 1/DSX-1]  
A Payload Loopback (PLB) is active on the  
specified interface.  
PVC Loopback Active, DLCI nnnn, A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI  
1,2  
frame_relay_link  
on the frame relay link.  
RLB Active, [Network 1/DSX-1]  
A network Repeater Loopback (RLB) is active on  
the specified interface.  
Send Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,  
frame_relay_link  
The unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on  
the specified DLCI for the interface.  
1,2  
Send Pttn Active, [Interface]  
A Send Pattern test is active on the specified  
interface.  
This test cannot be activated on user data ports  
that have Port Use set to Frame Relay.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status  
Network LMI-reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu → Status → LMI Reported DLCIs  
The LMI Reported DLCIs screen displays the status and CIR (if supported by the  
switch) for each DLCI, whether the DLCI is configured or not.  
LMI-Reported DLCIs Status Screen Example  
main/status/lmi_dlcis  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
05/26/1999 23:32  
frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs  
Page 1 of 2  
DLCI  
300  
305  
400  
410  
411  
420  
430  
501  
511  
520  
STATUS  
Active  
CIR (bps)  
16000  
DLCI  
622  
624  
625  
713  
822  
STATUS  
Active  
Active  
Deleted  
Active  
Active  
Active  
CIR (bps)  
32000  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Inactive  
Deleted  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Active  
Inactive  
Active  
Active  
32000  
32000  
32000  
32000  
32000  
* 1002  
256000  
64000  
* – DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
NextLink PrevLink  
Refresh PgUp PgDn  
An asterisk (*) next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for  
the link.  
DLCIs without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit. These DLCIs  
pass through the unit transparently, without being monitored and with no  
demultiplexing/multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being  
performed. Only DLCIs on the Net1-FR1 and Port-1 frame relay links appear on  
this screen; nonconfigured DLCIs on other links are discarded.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-9. Network LMI-Reported DLCIs Status  
Field  
Status  
What It Indicates  
DLCI  
16 through 1007  
Identifies the Local Management  
Interface-reported DLCI numbers  
assigned to the selected interface – the  
identifying number assigned to the path  
between two frame relay FrameSaver  
units’ ports.  
DLCI statuses are listed in ascending  
order (i.e., lowest number first).  
Status  
LMI-reported status of the DLCI:  
Active  
H Whether the DLCI is active (capable  
of carrying data) in the frame relay  
network,  
Inactive  
H Whether it is inactive in the frame  
relay network,  
1
Deleted  
H Whether it has been deleted by the  
frame relay network, or  
1
New  
H Whether it has been created by the  
frame relay network.  
CIR (bps)  
0–1536000  
Displays the committed information rate  
reported by the Stratacom switch. CIR  
information only appears in this column  
when LMI Protocol is set to Standard.  
If blank, the switch does not support this  
feature.  
1
Appears for 10 seconds only, before the network changes Deletedto Inactive  
and New to Active.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
PVC Connection Status  
PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu.  
Main Menu → Status → PVC Connection Status  
Only PVC connections with Source DLCIs configured to be Active are shown.  
PVC Connection Status Screen Example  
main/status/connections  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
05/26/1999 23:32  
Page 1 of 2  
PVC CONNECTION STATUS  
Primary Destination  
Source  
Link DLCI EDLCI Link  
DLCI EDLCI  
Status  
Port-1 201  
Port-1 202  
Port-1 100  
Port-1 204  
Mgmt PVC Mgm205  
Port-1 206  
Port-1 207  
Port-1 208  
Port-1 209  
Port-1 210  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
Net1-FR1  
300  
1001  
1001  
1001  
1001  
1001  
1001  
500  
0
0
2
2
2
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Inactive  
Inactive  
502  
504  
2
2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh  
PgUp PgDn  
If the No PVC Connectionsmessage appears instead of a list of PVC  
connections, no PVC connections have been configured yet.  
Table 5-10. PVC Connection Status (1 of 2)  
Field  
Status  
What It Indicates  
Link  
Identifies the cross-connection of  
DLCIs configured for the unit.  
Net1-FR1  
H Source/destination is frame relay  
link 1 on Network 1  
Port-1  
H User data port – Port-1  
MgmtPVCName  
H Virtual circuit is a management  
link that terminates in the unit,  
where Name is the link name  
DLCI  
16 to 1007  
For standard DLCIs.  
Identifies an individual link/  
connection embedded within a  
DLCI.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-10. PVC Connection Status (2 of 2)  
Field  
Status  
What It Indicates  
EDLCI  
0 to 62  
For multiplexed DLCIs only.  
Identifies an individual link/  
connection embedded within a  
DLCI.  
Status  
Identifies whether the physical  
interfaces, LMIs, and DLCIs are all  
enabled and active for this PVC  
connection.  
1
Active  
H The PVC is currently active.  
Inactive  
H The PVC is inactive because:  
– Alarm conditions and network  
and SLV communication  
status indicate that data  
cannot be successfully  
passed.  
– The unit has disabled the  
interface or frame relay link  
due to internal operating  
conventions.  
– Activation of an alternate  
virtual circuit is not warranted;  
that is, no alarm condition on  
the primary destination link  
has been detected.  
Disabled  
H The PVC cannot be activated  
and is essentially disabled as a  
result of how the unit was  
configured. Possible causes:  
– The physical interface at one  
or both ends of the PVC is/are  
disabled.  
– The frame relay link on one or  
both ends of the PVC is/are  
disabled.  
Invalid  
H Some portion of the PVC  
connection is not fully configured.  
1
For the circuit to be active, both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Time Slot Assignment Status  
Time Slot assignments are made using the Time Slot Assignment configuration  
option. See Assigning Time Slots/Cross Connections in Chapter 3, Configuration,  
for making time slot assignments. Use the Timeslot Assignment Status screen to  
display time slot assignments for the network channels and the DSX-1 channels.  
Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments  
Use the Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display DS0 assignments  
for each DS0 on the network interface.  
Main Menu → Status → Timeslot Assignment Status → Network  
The Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two-field entries in  
three rows. Together, each two-field entry defines the assignment for one network  
interface time slot. The top field represents the time slot of the network interface.  
The bottom field represents the cross-connect status of the associated (top field)  
network time slot.  
Network Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example  
main/status/timeslot/net_display  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
5/26/1999 23:32  
NETWORK 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS  
N01  
N02  
N03  
N04  
N05  
N06  
N07  
N08  
D5-1/01r  
D5-1/02r D5-1/03r  
S1P01  
S1P01  
S1P01  
S1P01  
S1P01  
N09  
N10  
N11  
N12  
N13  
N14  
N15  
N16  
FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1  
N17  
N118  
N19  
N20  
N21  
N22  
N23  
N24  
Unassign Unassign Unassign  
Unassign Unassign  
Unassign Unassign Unassign  
Slot 1 - T1 FR NAM  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Refresh  
MainMenu  
Exit  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
The following information is available for network interface time slots (N01– N24):  
The Cross Connect Status Field  
(bottom) . . .  
Indicates . . .  
Unassgn  
The time slot is unassigned.  
FrameRly1  
The time slot is assigned to the network frame  
relay link.  
Ds-p/tt  
The DSX-1 time slot tt is assigned to the network  
interface time slot (01 to 24).  
Ds-p/ttr  
The DSX-1 time slot tt is assigned to the network  
interface time slot (01 to 24), using Robbed Bit  
Signaling (r).  
Displaying DSX-1 Time Slot Assignments  
Use the DSX-1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display all of the DS0  
assignments for each DS0 on the DSX-1 interface.  
Main Menu → Status → Timeslot Assignment Status → DSX-1  
The DSX-1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two-field entries in  
three rows. Together, each two-field entry defines the assignment for one DSX-1  
interface time slot. The top field represents the time slot of the DSX-1 Interface.  
The bottom field represents the cross-connect status of the associated (top field)  
DSX-1 time slot.  
DSX-1 Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example  
main/status/timeslot/dsx_display  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
5/26/1999 23:32  
DSX-1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS  
D01  
D02  
D03  
D04  
D05  
D06  
D07  
D08  
D05-1/01r D05-1/02r D05-1/03r S1P01  
S1P01  
S1P01  
S1P01  
S1P01  
D09  
D10  
D11  
D12  
D13  
D14  
D15  
D16  
FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1  
D17 D118 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24  
Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign  
Slot 1 - T1 FR NAM  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
Refresh  
MainMenu  
Exit  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
The following information is available for DSX-1 interface time slots (D01– D24):  
The Cross Connect Status Field  
(bottom) . . .  
Indicates the . . .  
blank  
The time slot is unassigned.  
Net1/tt  
Network interface 1, time slot (tt) is assigned to  
DSX-1 time slot (01 to 24) using Clear Channel.  
Net1/ttr  
Network interface 1, time slot (tt) is assigned to  
DSX-1 time slot (01 to 24) using Robbed Bit  
Signaling (r).  
Performance Statistics  
Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a  
selected interface. Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the  
severity and frequency or duration of a condition.  
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics  
Physical and link layer statistics (Layers 1 and 2) are collected on the port. The  
following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected.  
Performance Statistics Menu  
main/status/performance  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
5/26/1999 23:32  
PERFORMANCE STATISTICS  
Service Level Verification  
DLCI  
Frame Relay  
ESF Line  
Clear All Statistics  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Clearing Performance Statistics  
Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a  
directly-connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level  
is Level-1. This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems.  
Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature. True statistic counts  
are always maintained so SLAs can be verified, and they can be viewed from an  
SNMP NMS. However, since statistics can be cleared locally, the statistics viewed  
via the menu-driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the  
NMS.  
" Procedure  
To clear all statistics:  
Performance Statistics → Clear All Statistics  
" Procedure  
To clear specific sets of statistics:  
H
Use the ClrSLV&DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI  
performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of  
the following screens:  
Performance Statistics → Service Level Verification  
Performance Statistics → DLCI  
H
H
Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance  
statistics.  
Performance Statistics → Frame Relay  
Use the ClrNearStats or ClrFarStats function key to reset all near-end or all  
far-end Extended SuperFrame (ESF) line performance statistics.  
Performance Statistics → ESF Line  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics  
These statistics appear when Service Level Verification (SLV) is selected from  
the Performance Statistics menu.  
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → Service Level Verification  
They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCIs are multiplexed.  
Table 5-11. Service Level Verification Performance Statistics (1 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
Far End Circuit  
Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI/VCI (Virtual Path  
Identifier/Virtual Channel Identifier) at the other end of the  
connection.  
If the far-end circuit is a DLCI, the DLCI number (16–1007)  
appears. If a VPI/VCI, the number is displayed as xx,yyy,  
xx being the VPI number (0 –15) and yyy being the VCI  
number (32–2047).  
Noneappears if the unit has not communicated with the other  
end.  
Far End IP Addr  
IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed  
DLCI connection.  
Noneappears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated  
with the other end, or if the device at the other end of the  
multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured.  
Dropped SLV  
Responses  
The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a  
response from the far-end device has not been received.  
Inbound Dropped  
Frames  
Total number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were dropped in transit.  
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is  
32  
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.  
The SLV Delivery Ratio option (see Table 3-2, Service Level  
Verification Options) must be enabled for these statistics to  
appear.  
H Above CIR  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the committed information rate and were  
dropped in transit.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were within the committed information rate, but were  
dropped in transit.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H Above EIR  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were between the committed information rate and excess  
information rate, and were dropped in transit.  
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the excess information rate and were dropped  
in transit.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-11. Service Level Verification Performance Statistics (2 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
Inbound Dropped  
Characters  
Total number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were dropped in transit.  
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is  
32  
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.  
The SLV Delivery Ratio option (see Table 3-2, Service Level  
Verification Options) must be enabled for these statistics to  
appear. NAappears instead of a statistical count if FDR/DDR  
(Frame Delivery Ratio/Data Delivery Ratio) information is not  
being received from the far-end device .  
H Above CIR  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the committed information rate and were  
dropped in transit.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were within within the committed information rate, but were  
dropped in transit.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H Above EIR  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were between the committed information rate and excess  
information rate, and were dropped in transit.  
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that  
were above the excess information rate and were dropped  
in transit.  
Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between  
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the  
multiplexed DLCI connection.  
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device is  
not successful.  
Avg RdTrip Latency  
Average round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between  
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the  
multiplexed DLCI connection.  
Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling  
interval and the average is computed (using packets with the  
configured SLV Packet Size (bytes), Table 3-2, Service Level  
Verification Options) over the previous 15-minute period. If  
SLV Packet Size is changed, a new average is not available  
until a new sample has been received.  
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device  
over the last 15 minutes has not been successful.  
Max RdTrip Latency  
Same as average (Avg RdTrip Latency), but storing the  
maximum value of latency over the previous 15-minute  
interval.  
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device  
over the last 15 minutes has not been successful.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the  
connection. If the far-end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit, frame relay, latency,  
and FDR/DDR* performance statistics are collected. If the far-end device is a  
non-FrameSaver device, or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620, only frame relay  
statistics are collected.  
DLCI Performance Statistics  
These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics  
menu.  
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → DLCI  
Table 5-12. DLCI Performance Statistics (1 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
1
DLCI Up Since  
Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a  
period of inactivity. Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive.  
If the DLCI was Down, this is the time that the DLCI recovered.  
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the first time the unit  
discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.  
1
DLCI Up Time  
Days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the DLCI was last  
declared Active after a period of inactivity. Down is displayed if  
the DLCI is inactive.  
If the DLCI was Down, this is the amount of time since the  
DLCI recovered.  
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the amount of time since  
the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.  
Total Tx Frames/  
Tx Octets  
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes)  
transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device  
for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were  
within the committed information rate.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device  
on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were  
between the committed information rate and excess  
information rate.  
H Above EIR  
H The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device  
on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above  
the excess information rate.  
H With DE Set  
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI  
of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.  
1
Only appears for the network interface.  
* Frame Relay Delivery Ratio (delivered frames/offered frames); Data Delivery Ratio (delivered octets/offered octets)  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-12. DLCI Performance Statistics (2 of 2)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
H With BECN Set  
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI  
of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion  
notifications.  
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in  
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN  
indicator.  
Total Rx Frames/  
Rx Octets  
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes) received  
for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.  
H Within CIR  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed  
information rate.  
H Between CIR&EIR  
H Above EIR  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the  
committed information rate and excess information rate.  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess  
information rate.  
H With DE Set  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.  
H With BECN Set  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit  
congestion notifications.  
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in  
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN  
indicator.  
H With FECN Set  
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected  
DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion  
notifications.  
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic  
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the  
FECN indicator.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
Frame Relay Performance Statistics  
The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the  
Performance Statistics menu.  
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → Frame Relay  
32  
All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached (2 –2),  
then the count starts over. The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear  
when multiple frame relay links have been configured.  
Table 5-13. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (1 of 3)  
Statistic  
What It Indicates  
Frame Relay Link  
Frames Sent  
The number of frames sent over the interface.  
Frames Received  
Characters Sent  
Characters Received  
FECNs Received  
The number of frames received over the interface.  
The number of data octets (bytes) sent over the interface.  
The number of data octets (bytes) received over the interface.  
The number of foreward explicit congestion notifications  
received over the interface.  
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic  
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the  
FECN indicator.  
BECNs Received  
The number of backward explicit congestion notifications  
received over the interface.  
The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic  
congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the  
BECN indicator.  
Frame Relay Errors  
Total Errors  
The number of total frame relay errors, excluding LMI errors.  
Short frames, long frames, invalid DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and  
unknown errors are included in this total.  
Indicates that there may be a non-frame relay device on the  
other end of the link, or the units at either the far-end or both  
ends of the link may be configured incorrectly.  
Invalid Rx Frames  
The number of invalid frames received over the Network or  
Port-1 interface.  
There is a non-frame relay device on the other end of the link.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-13. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (2 of 3)  
Statistic What It Indicates  
Frame Relay Errors (cont’d)  
Short Rx Frames  
The number of frames received over the Network or Port-1  
interface that were less than 5-octets (five 8-bit bytes) in  
length.  
There may be a non-frame relay device on the other end of  
the link.  
Long Rx Frames  
Invalid DLCI  
The number of frames received over the Network or Port-1  
interface that were more than 8192-octets in length.  
The device on the far end of the link may be configured  
incorrectly.  
The number of frames received over the interface that were  
addressed to DLCIs outside the valid range; that is, a number  
less than 16 or greater than 1007.  
The device on the far end of the circuit may have been  
configured incorrectly, or the DLCIs configured for the  
FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCIs supplied by the  
service provider.  
Unknown DLCI  
Unknown Error  
The number of frames received over the interface that were  
addressed to unknown DLCIs.  
The DLCI may not have been configured, or it has been  
configured to be Inactive.  
Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or  
either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly.  
The number of frames received over the interface that do not  
fall into one of the other statistic categories.  
Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize.  
Frame Relay LMI  
LMI Protocol  
The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link.  
Normal condition.  
Status Msg Received  
Total LMI Errors  
The number of LMI status messages received over the  
interface.  
Normal condition.  
The number of LMI errors. Reliability errors, protocol errors,  
unknown report types, unknown information elements, and  
sequence errors are included in this total.  
Network problems.  
Number of Inactives  
The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link  
Inactive.  
Network problems.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Table 5-13. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (3 of 3)  
Statistic What It Indicates  
Frame Relay HDLC Errors  
Rx Total Errors  
The number of receiver errors on the interface. The following  
are included in this count:  
H Receive invalid frames (short frames, long frames, invalid  
DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and unknown errors)  
H Rx Total Discards  
H Receive errors (non-octet aligned frames, frames with CRC  
errors, and Rx Overruns)  
Rx Total Discards  
The number of receiver discards on the interface. The  
following are included in this count:  
H Resource errors  
H Rx Overruns  
H Frames received when the link was down  
H Inactive and disconnected DLCIs  
H Inactive destination DLCIs  
H Unknown EDLCIs  
Rx Overruns  
The number of receiver overruns (too many bits) on the  
interface.  
Rx Non-Octet Frames The number of non-octet frames received on the interface.  
Rx CRC Errors  
Tx Total Errors  
The number of received CRC (cycle redundancy check) errors.  
The total number of transmit errors on the interface, including  
transmits discards and transmit overruns.  
Tx Total Discards  
Tx Underruns  
The total number of transmit discards on the interface,  
including underrun flushes.  
The number of transmitter underruns (too few bits) on the  
interface.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
ESF Line Performance Statistics  
These statistics appear when ESF Line is selected from the Performance  
Statistics menu for the network interface.  
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → ESF Line  
Only seven T1 network statistical intervals appear on the screen at any one time.  
You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering:  
H
H
Interval Number (01–96)  
– or –  
Time (Hours and Minutes)  
NOTES:  
Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one;  
Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one, etc.  
Selecting a specific time is useful when the approximate time at which a  
specific event occurred is known.  
Edit any of the interval or time fields on lines 10, 13, or 16. When Enter is  
pressed, the values change to the selected range.  
To select intervals . . .  
You must enter an interval or time on . . .  
Occurring on and before a  
selected interval or time  
Line 10. The display will include the selected interval plus  
the 6 intervals recorded before it.  
Bracketing a selected  
interval or time  
Line 13. The display will include the selected interval plus  
the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals  
recorded after it.  
Occurring on and after a  
selected interval or time  
Line 16. The display will include the selected interval plus  
the 6 intervals recorded after it.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
ESF Line Performance Statistics Screen Example  
main/status/performance/esf  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
05/26/1999 23:32  
Network 1 ESF LINE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS  
Current Interval Timer  
Near=123 Far = 124  
ESF Error Events  
Near = 15 Far = 12  
–––ES––  
––UAS––  
––SES––  
––BES––  
––CSS––  
–LOFC––  
Time  
Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far  
Current: 10:37  
Int 01: 10:35  
Int 02: 10:20  
Int 03: 10:05  
Int 04: 09:50  
Int 05: 09:35  
Int 06: 09:20  
Int 07: 09:05  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Line 10  
Line 13  
Line 16  
Line 18  
Worst Interval:  
Near Tot(valid 96): 00010  
Far Tot(valid 96): 00010  
24 24  
14 14  
00000  
00000  
14 14  
00000  
00000  
09 09  
00000  
00000  
18 16  
002  
44 44  
003  
002  
003  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrFarStats ClrNearStats  
Select: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09 ...  
For the ESF line performance statistics, the following performance statistics are  
kept for each 15-minute interval over the past 24-hour period. A Near set and a  
Far set are kept for each statistic. The Far set is based on information kept by the  
unit at the other end of the local loop and is only available when ANSI  
performance report messages are enabled in the unit.  
Summary information that appears near the top of the screen includes:  
H
Near/Far Current Interval Timer – Contains the number of seconds that  
have elapsed in the current 15-minute interval for the near or far information,  
which can show a value up to 900 seconds.  
H
Near/Far ESF Error Events – Maintains a count of ESF error events, as  
specified by AT&T TR 54016, which counts CRC and OOF events. A  
maximum of 65,535 error events can be counted. Once 65535 is reached,  
it stays at that number until the network issues a reset command.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
The following performance statistics are collected for ESF line conditions:  
Statistic What It Indicates  
Errored Seconds (ES) Any second with one or more ESF Error events.  
Unavailable Seconds  
(UAS)  
Any second in which service is unavailable. Begins  
incrementing at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds of  
severely errored seconds (SES), and stops incrementing after  
10 consecutive seconds of no SESs.  
Severely Errored  
Seconds (SES)  
Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one or more  
Out Of Frame (OOF) events.  
Bursty Errored  
Seconds (BES)  
Any second with more than one, but less than 320 CRC errors.  
Controlled Slip  
Seconds (CSS)  
Any second with one or more controlled slips (a replication or  
deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device). This is  
collected for network performance statistics only.  
Loss of Frame Count  
(LOFC)  
The number of Loss of Frame conditions.  
Worst Interval  
The largest number of seconds for either ES, UAS, SES, BES,  
or CSS, or the greatest Loss of Frame Count (LOFC).  
If more than one interval contains the same worst value, then  
the oldest interval is displayed.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
FTP File Transfers  
The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server  
over Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). A complete binary image of the  
configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup. To use this  
feature, the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions.  
Using this feature, you can transfer configuration files to/from a FrameSaver  
node, program files to a FrameSaver node, and User History data from a  
FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a  
management PVC, or through the COM port.  
Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer:  
H
You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get  
commands. However, you can retrieve the data file for the user history  
reports regardless of access level.  
H
You cannot put a configuration file to the factory.cfg or current.cfg files  
under the system directory. Configuration files should be put to a customer  
file (cust1.cfg or cust2.cfg), then loaded into the downloaded unit’s Current  
Configuration via the menu-driven user interface.  
H
H
H
You can only put a NAM program file (nam.ocd) into a FrameSaver unit. You  
cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host.  
Before putting a download file, you must use the bin binary command to  
place the data connection in binary transfer mode.  
When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS, you can only get  
a uhbcfull.dat file. It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get  
this information (see Transferring Collected Data).  
H
H
A data file (uhbcfull.dat or lmitrace.syc) cannot be put into a FrameSaver  
node.  
LMI packet capture data (lmitrace.syc) is not readable when the LMI Packet  
Capture Utility is active.  
FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to  
be downloaded in the background, using the selected bandwidth and without  
interfering with normal operation. Downloads can be performed quickly, using the  
full line speed, or at a slower rate over an extended period of time.  
You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would  
initiate an FTP to any other IP-addressable device.  
NOTE:  
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer  
Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take  
time. Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit’s  
currently active configuration.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
" Procedure  
To initiate an FTP session:  
1. Start the FTP client program on your host. For example, on a UNIX host,  
type ftp, followed by the FrameSaver unit’s IP address.  
2. If a login and password are required (see Creating a Login in Chapter 4,  
Security and Logins), you are prompted to enter them. If not, press Enter.  
The FTP prompt appears.  
The starting directory is the root directory (/). Use standard FTP commands  
during the FTP session, as well as the following remote FTP commands.  
Command  
Definition  
cd directory  
Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the  
specified directory.  
dir [directory]  
Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory.  
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.  
get file1 [file2]  
Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node  
to the local directory on the host (for configuration files only).  
remotehelp  
[command]  
Print the meaning of the command. If no argument is given, a  
list of all known commands is printed.  
ls [directory]  
Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory’s contents.  
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.  
put file1 [file2]  
Copy file1 from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the  
current directory of the FrameSaver node. If file2 is not  
specified, the file will be named file1 on the FrameSaver node.  
recv file1 [file 2]  
send file1 [file 2]  
pwd  
Same as a get.  
Same as a put.  
Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit  
node.  
bin  
Places the FTP session in binary-transfer mode.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation and Maintenance  
Upgrading System Software  
If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit’s program code, you must transfer  
the upgrade of the nam.ocd file in the system memory directory using the put  
command.  
NOTE:  
Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC,  
or through the COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link (see Table 3-17,  
Communication Port Options).  
" Procedure  
To download software:  
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading.  
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.  
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the  
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.  
4. Type cd system to change to the system directory.  
5. Perform a put of Rxxxxxx.ocd (xxxxxx being the software release number) to  
the nam.ocd file to start the upgrade.  
If the message displayed is . . .  
Then . . .  
nam.ocd: File Transfer Complete  
The download was successful. The file is  
loaded into system memory.  
nam.ocd: File Transfer Failed –  
The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit.  
Invalid file  
A different Rxxxxxx.ocd file will need to be  
downloaded. Repeat the step or end the  
FTP session.  
NOTE:  
During the download, a series of hash marks (#) appear. When the hash  
marks stop appearing, there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the  
nam.ocd: File Transfer Completemessage appears. Please be  
patient. Do not exit from FTP at this time.  
See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Determining Whether a Download Is Completed  
To see whether a download has completed, check the Identity screen.  
Main Menu → Status → Identity  
Check Alternate Software Rev. under the NAM Identity column.  
H
H
H
If a software revision number appears, the file transfer is complete.  
If In Progressappears, the file is still being transferred.  
If Invalidappears, no download has occurred or the download was not  
successful.  
Changing Software  
Once a software upgrade is downloaded, it needs to be activated. When  
activated, the unit resets, then executes the downloaded software. With this  
feature, you control when the upgrade software is implemented.  
" Procedure  
To switch to the new software:  
1. Go to the Control menu, and select Select Software Release.  
Main Menu → Control → Select Software Release  
The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just  
transferred are shown.  
If the download failed, Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field  
instead of the new release number. Repeat the procedure in Upgrading  
System Software if this occurs.  
2. Select Switch&Reset.  
3. Enter Yes to the Are you sure? prompt. The unit resets and begins  
installing the newly transferred software.  
4. Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current  
Software Revision.  
Main Menu → Status → Identity  
NOTE:  
If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit’s Identity  
screen while the unit is downloading software, the In Progress...  
message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field.  
See Displaying System Information to see what is included on the unit’s  
Identity screen.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
Transferring Collected Data  
SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an  
NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP, which is faster than other  
methods. The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the  
FTP Max Receive Rate (Kbps) option (see Table 3-14, Telnet and FTP Session  
Options in Chapter 3, Configuration).  
NOTE:  
Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet  
data; the data files are not in user-readable format. LMI packet capture data  
can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log (see Viewing Captured Packets  
from the Menu-Driven User Interface in Chapter 6, Troubleshooting, for  
additional information).  
" Procedure  
To retrieve data:  
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data  
will be retrieved.  
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.  
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the  
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.  
4. Type cd data to change to the data directory.  
If retrieving . . .  
Then . . .  
SLV statistics  
Perform a get of the uhbcfull.dat file.  
H File Transfer Complete– Transfer was  
successful.  
H File Transfer Failed– Transfer was not  
successful. Try again or end the session.  
LMI packet capture data  
1. Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility.  
Main Menu → Control → LMI Packet Capture Utility  
LMI packet capture data is not available (readable)  
when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active.  
2. Perform a get of the lmitrace.syc file.  
One of the following will display for the file:  
– File Transfer Complete  
– File Transfer Failed  
– Permission Denied– The LMI Packet  
Capture Utility was not readable. Stop the LMI  
Packet Capture Utility and try again.  
3. Close the FTP session.  
SLV statistics and/or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation and Maintenance  
This page intentionally left blank.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
6
This chapter includes the following:  
H
H
Problem Indicators  
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication  
— Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu  
— Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power  
— Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit  
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature  
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature  
H
H
— Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface  
Alarms  
H
H
Troubleshooting Tables  
— Device Problems  
— Frame Relay PVC Problems  
Tests Available  
H
H
H
— Test Timeout Feature  
Starting and Stopping a Test  
— Aborting All Tests  
PVC Tests  
— PVC Loopback  
— Send Pattern  
— Monitor Pattern  
— Connectivity  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
H
Physical Tests  
— Line Loopback  
— Payload Loopback  
— Repeater Loopback  
— DTE Loopback  
— Send Line Loopback  
— Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link  
— Send Remote Line Loopback  
— Send and Monitor Pattern Tests  
IP Ping Test  
H
H
Lamp Test  
Problem Indicators  
The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems:  
Indicators . . .  
See . . .  
LEDs  
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in  
Chapter 5, Operation and Maintenance, as well as the  
user interface screen.  
Main Menu → Status →  
Display LEDs and Control LEDs  
Health and Status  
Health and Status Messages in Chapter 5, Operation and  
Maintenance.  
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status  
Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu-driven  
user interface screen.  
Performance statistics  
Performance Statistics in Chapter 5, Operation and  
Maintenance, to help you determine how long a problem  
has existed.  
Alarm conditions that will  
generate an SNMP trap  
Alarms on page 6-7.  
SNMP traps  
Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm  
Defaults.  
Traps supported include warm-start, authentication-failure,  
enterprise-specific (those specific to the unit), link-up, and  
link-down.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication  
You can reset the unit in one of four ways:  
H
H
H
Reset it from the Control menu.  
Cycle the power.  
Reset the configuration options for the COM port, or reload the factory default  
settings.  
H
Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS (see your NMS documentation).  
The unit performs a self-test when it is reset.  
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu  
Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power-on self-test of the unit.  
" Procedure  
To reset the unit from the Control menu:  
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.  
2. Select Reset Device and press Enter. The Are You Sure?prompt  
appears.  
3. Type y (Yes) and press Enter. The unit reinitializes itself, performing a  
self-test.  
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power  
Disconnecting, then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit  
Misconfiguring the unit could render the menu-driven user interface inaccessible.  
If this occurs, connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected  
asynchronous terminal.  
" Procedure  
To reset COM port settings:  
1. Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19.2 kbps, using character  
length of 8 bits, with one stop-bit, and no parity. In addition, set Flow Control  
to None.  
2. Reset the unit, then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen  
appears. (See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication for other  
methods of resetting the unit.)  
3. Tab to the desired prompt, and type y (Yes) at one of the prompts.  
If selecting . . .  
The following occurs . . .  
Reset COM Port usage  
H Port Use is set to Terminal so the  
asynchronous terminal can be used.  
H Data Rate (Kbps), Character Length, Stop Bits,  
and Parity are reset to the factory defaults.  
H Unit resets itself.  
Reload Factory Defaults  
H All configuration and control settings are reset  
to the Default Factory Configuration,  
overwriting the current configuration.  
H Unit resets itself.  
CAUTION: This causes the current configuration  
to be destroyed and a self-test to be  
performed.  
If no selection is made within 30 seconds, or if No (n) is entered, the unit  
resets itself and no configuration changes are made.  
Once the unit resets itself, connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen  
appears.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature  
A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service  
providers isolate device problems within their networks. This feature allows Telnet  
or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is  
essentially transparent to customer operations. No alarms or SNMP traps are  
generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer.  
See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3, Configuration, for additional  
information about this feature.  
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature  
A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI  
errors are detected. Using this utility, any enabled frame relay link on the user  
data port or network interface can be selected. The utility captures any LMI  
packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called lmitrace.syc in the  
system’s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network  
Associates Sniffer for analysis.  
The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information. See  
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface for additional  
information on this feature.  
" Procedure  
To use this utility:  
1. Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility.  
Main Menu → Control → LMI Packet Capture Utility  
2. Select an enabled frame relay link, or Capture Interface, either Net1-FR1  
or Port-1.  
3. Start packet capture.  
While capturing data, the status is Active. Packets in Buffer indicates the  
number of packets that have been captured. Up to 8000 packets can be held.  
When the buffer is full, the oldest packets will be overwritten.  
4. To stop the utility, press Enter. The field toggles back to Start.  
5. Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the  
information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for  
debugging/decoding.  
See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 5, Operation and Maintenance, for  
additional information about this feature.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface  
The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log. Once the capture  
buffer or trace log is full, the oldest packets are overwritten. To view the most  
recently captured packets using the menu-driven user interface:  
LMI Packet Capture Utility → Display LMI Trace Log  
LMI Trace Log Example  
main/control/lmi_capture/display_log  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
5/26/1999 23:32  
LMI TRACE LOG  
Page 1 of 3  
Packets Transmitted to Net1-FR!  
LMI Record #1 at 0 s  
Packets Received from Net1-FR1  
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes  
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023  
Sequence Number Exchange  
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177  
LMI Record #2 at 0 s  
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes  
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023  
Sequence Number Exchange  
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
Refresh PgUp PgDn  
Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI  
messages.  
The following information is provided:  
H
The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet (1–8000), and the  
amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured.  
The maximum amount of time displayed is 4,294,967 seconds (s), which is  
reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded.  
H
H
H
H
H
The type of message, either Status or Status Enquiry, from the captured  
packet, and the number of bytes in the packet.  
The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured  
packet, and the DLCI number for the packet.  
The type of information contained in the captured packet, either Sequence  
Number Exchange or Full Status Report.  
The send and receive (rcv) sequence numbers from the captured packet  
(0–255).  
On the Packets Received side of the screen, PVC status for up to ten DLCIs  
can be shown. It shows the DLCI number, its active bit status, and if Standard  
LMI is running, the DLCI’s CIR value.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Alarms  
The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP  
trap for a physical interface, and the frame relay LMIs and DLCIs. These alarm  
conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and  
Test Status screen.  
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status  
Table 6-1. Alarm Conditions (1 of 6)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
AIS at Network 1  
An Alarm Indication Signal  
(AIS) is being received by  
the interface. AIS is an  
For the network interface, report  
the problem to your T1 service  
provider.  
unframed, all ones signal.  
AIS at DSX-1  
For the DSX-1 interface,  
the attached DTE is  
transmitting an AIS.  
For the DSX-1 interface, check  
the DTE attached to the  
interface.  
EER at Network 1  
The error rate of the  
H Verify that the network cable is  
securely attached at the  
network interface.  
received network signal  
exceeds the currently  
configured threshold. This  
condition only occurs if the  
network interface is  
H Contact your network provider.  
configured for ESF framing.  
This condition clears when  
the error rate falls below the  
threshold value, which may  
take up to 15 minutes.  
CTS down to  
Port-1 Device  
The CTS control lead on  
the device’s interface is off. Port-1.  
Check DTR and RTS from  
H Verify that the port is enabled.  
H Check DTR from the user data  
port.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 6-1. Alarm Conditions (2 of 6)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
DLCI nnnn Down,  
frame relay link  
The DLCI for the specified  
frame relay link is down.  
Verify that the network LMI is up.  
If it is, contact your network  
service provider.  
1,2  
DTR Down from  
Port-1 Device  
The DTR control lead on  
the device connected to the cable connected to the system’s  
specified port is off. This  
message applies to data  
ports that act as DCEs.  
Examine the attached DTE and  
port.  
H Check that the port cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
H Check the status of the  
attached equipment.  
Link Down  
Administratively,  
frame relay link  
The specified frame relay  
link has been disabled by  
the unit due to LMI  
Verify that the network LMI is up.  
If it is, contact your network  
provider.  
2
Behavior conditions or LMI  
Protocol on another link is  
in a failed state.  
This is not an alarm  
condition so System  
Operationalappears,  
as well.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 6-1. Alarm Conditions (3 of 6)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
LMI Down,  
frame relay link  
The Local Management  
Interface is down for the  
specified frame relay link.  
For the network interface:  
2
H If LMI was never up, verify  
that the LMI Protocol setting  
reflects the LMI type being  
used.  
H If LMI was never up:  
– Verify that the proper time  
slots have been configured.  
– Verify that the LMI Protocol  
setting reflects the LMI type  
being used.  
H Verify that Frame Relay  
Performance Statistics show  
LMI frames being transmitted.  
If all of the above have been  
verified and the physical link is  
not in Alarm, contact your  
network provider.  
For user data port:  
H Check that the DTE cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
H Verify that Transmit Clock  
Source and Invert Transmit  
Clock options are properly  
configured.  
H Verify that Frame Relay  
Performance Statistics show  
LMI frames being received. If  
no frames are being received:  
– Check the attached device.  
– Verify that the LMI Protocol  
setting reflects the LMI type  
being used.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network port, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 6-1. Alarm Conditions (4 of 6)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
LOS at DSX-1  
A Loss of Signal (LOS)  
condition is detected on the  
DSX-1 interface. Clears  
when the ratio of ones to  
zeros received is greater  
than or equal to 12.5%.  
H DSX-1 cable problem.  
H Check that the DSX-1 cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
H No signal being  
transmitted from the  
DTE.  
H Check the DTE status.  
LOS at Network 1  
A Loss of Signal (LOS)  
condition is detected on the  
network interface. Clears  
when the ratio of ones to  
zeros received is greater  
than or equal to 12.5%.  
H Network cable problem.  
H Check that the network cable  
is securely attached at both  
ends.  
H No signal is being  
transmitted at the far-end  
FrameSaver unit.  
H Check far-end FrameSaver  
unit status.  
H T1 facility problem.  
H Contact your network provider.  
Network Com Link  
Down  
The communication link for Check the router connected to  
the COM port is down and  
the COM port is configured  
for Net Link.  
the COM port.  
OOF at DSX-1  
An Out of Frame (OOF)  
condition is detected on the  
DSX-1 interface.  
H Incompatible framing  
format between the DTE  
and the FrameSaver  
unit.  
H Check that the framing format  
for the DSX-1 (DTE) interface  
is correct.  
H DSX-1 cabling problem.  
H Check that the DSX-1 cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 6-1. Alarm Conditions (5 of 6)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
OOF at Network 1  
An Out of Frame (OOF)  
condition is detected on the  
network interface.  
H Incompatible framing  
format between the  
network and the  
H Check that the framing format  
for the network interface is  
correct.  
FrameSaver unit.  
H Network cabling  
H Check that the network cable  
is securely attached at both  
ends.  
problem.  
H T1 facility problem.  
H Contact your network provider.  
H Check that the network cable  
is securely attached at both  
ends.  
Primary Clock Failed  
A failure of the configured  
primary clock source for the  
unit was detected and the  
secondary clock is  
providing the timing for the  
unit.  
H Contact your network provider.  
This condition clears when  
the configured primary  
clock is restored.  
Primary & Secondary  
Clocks Failed  
A failure of both clock  
sources configured for the  
unit was detected.  
This condition only applies  
to T1 network and DSX-1  
interfaces. It clears when  
the configured primary  
clock is restored.  
Secondary Clock  
Failed  
A failure of the configured  
secondary clock source for  
the unit was detected and  
the internal clock is  
providing the timing for the  
unit.  
The clock source will not  
automatically switch from  
internal until the primary  
clock source returns.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 6-1. Alarm Conditions (6 of 6)  
Alarm Condition  
What It Indicates  
What To Do  
Self-Test Failure  
The unit did not pass its  
basic verification tests  
when it was powered on or  
reset.  
H Reset the unit.  
H Contact your service  
representative.  
SLV Timeout,  
DLCI nnnn,  
frame relay link  
An excessive number of  
SLV communication  
responses from the remote service provider.  
system have been missed  
on the specified multiplexed  
DLCI and link.  
Verify that the network LMI is up.  
If it is, contact your network  
1,2  
If the frame relay link is  
Net1-FR1, the timeout is on  
the network FrameRly1  
timeslot assignment.  
When a hardware bypass-  
capable device has been  
detected at the other end of  
the PVC and this condition  
occurs, only user data for  
EDLCI 0 will be transmitted  
as long as the condition  
exists.  
Yellow at DSX-1  
A yellow alarm signal is  
received on the DSX-1  
interface. DTE has  
detected a LOS or OOF  
condition.  
H Check that the DSX-1 cable is  
securely attached at both  
ends.  
H Check the status of the  
attached equipment.  
Yellow at Network 1  
A yellow alarm signal is  
received on the network  
interface.  
H Network cable problem.  
H Check that your network cable  
is securely attached at both  
ends.  
H T1 facility problem.  
H Contact your network provider.  
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.  
2
frame relay link is one of the following:  
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.  
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Tables  
The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble-free service. However, if a  
problem occurs, refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for  
possible solutions.  
Device Problems  
Table 6-2. Device Problems (1 of 2)  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Solutions  
No power, or the LEDs The power cord is not  
Check that the power cord is  
securely attached at both ends.  
are not lit.  
securely plugged into the  
wall receptacle to rear  
panel connection.  
The wall receptacle has no  
power.  
H Check the wall receptacle  
power by plugging in some  
equipment that is known to be  
working.  
H Check the circuit breaker.  
H Verify that your site is not on  
an energy management  
program.  
Power-On Self-Test  
fails. Only Alarm LED  
is on after power-up.  
The unit has detected an  
internal hardware failure.  
H Reset the unit and try again.  
H Contact your service  
representative.  
H Return the unit to the factory.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table 6-2. Device Problems (2 of 2)  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Solutions  
Cannot access the  
unit or the  
menu-driven user  
interface.  
Login or password is  
incorrect, COM port is  
misconfigured, or the unit is  
otherwise configured so it  
prevents access.  
H Reset the unit (see  
Restoring Communication  
with a Misconfigured Unit.)  
H Contact your service  
representative.  
Failure xxxxxxxx  
The unit has detected an  
internal software failure.  
H Record the 8-digit code from  
the System and Test Status  
screen.  
appears at the top of  
the System and Test  
Status screen, at  
Self-Test Results.  
H Reset the unit and try again.  
H Contact your service  
representative and provide the  
8-digit failure code.  
An LED appears  
dysfunctional.  
LED is burned out.  
Run the Lamp Test. If the LED in  
question does not flash with the  
other LEDs, then contact your  
service representative.  
Not receiving data.  
Network cable loose or  
broken.  
H Reconnect or repair the cable.  
H Call the network service  
provider.  
Receiving data errors  
on a multiplexed DLCI, being used for automatic  
but frame relay is  
okay.  
Frame Relay Discovery is  
Change the DLCI Type for each  
network DLCI from Multiplexed to  
Standard, turning off  
DLCI and PVC  
configuration.  
multiplexing.  
The equipment at the other  
end is not frame relay  
RFC 1490-compliant.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Frame Relay PVC Problems  
Table 6-3. Frame Relay PVC Problems  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Solutions  
No receipt or  
transmission of data  
Cross Connection of the  
DLCIs are configured  
incorrectly.  
Verify the PVC connections  
and DLCIs by checking the  
network-discovered DLCIs on  
the LMI Reported DLCIs screen.  
DLCI is inactive on the  
frame relay network.  
H Verify that the DLCI(s) is  
active on the LMI Reported  
DLCIs screen. If the DLCI(s) is  
not active, contact the service  
provider.  
H Verify the LMI Reported DLCI  
field on the Interface Status  
screen.  
DTE is configured  
incorrectly.  
Check the DTE’s configuration.  
LMI is not configured  
properly for the DTE or  
network.  
Configure LMI characteristics to  
match those of the DTE or  
network.  
LMI link is inactive.  
Verify that the LMI link is active  
on the network; the Status Msg  
Received counter on the Network  
Frame Relay Performance  
Statistics screen increments.  
Losing Data  
Out of Sync  
Frame relay network is  
experiencing problems.  
Run PVC Loopback and Pattern  
tests to isolate the problem, then  
contact the service provider.  
If Monitor Pattern was  
selected, it means the test  
pattern generator and  
receiver have not yet  
synchronized.  
H Verify that the unit at the  
other end is configured to  
Send Pattern.  
Correct unit configurations.  
H Correct the CIR setting so  
both units are configured the  
same.  
CIR settings for the units at  
each end are mismatched.  
If the message persists, it  
means that 5 packets out of  
25 are missing or are out of  
sequence.  
H Check the line’s error rate –  
the physical line quality.  
Contact the service provider.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Tests Available  
The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9124.  
Test Menu Example  
main/test  
9124-II  
Device Name: Node A  
5/26/1999 23:32  
TEST  
Network PVC Tests  
Data Port PVC Tests  
Network Physical Tests  
Data Port Physical Tests  
DSX-1 Physical Tests  
IP Ping  
Lamp Test  
Abort All Tests  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured  
on the interface. Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and  
secured.  
Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5.x management solution using its  
Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface, as well as from the menu-driven  
user interface.  
Test Timeout Feature  
A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test (as opposed  
to manually terminating a test) after it has been running a specified period of  
time.  
It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is  
remotely managed through an inband data stream (PVC). If a test is accidently  
commanded to execute on the interface providing management access, control is  
regained when the specified time period expires, automatically terminating the  
test.  
To use this feature, enable the Test Timeout configuration option, and set a  
duration for the test to run in the Test Duration (min) configuration option (see  
Configuring General System Options in Chapter 3, Configuration).  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
NOTE:  
These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE,  
like a DTE-initiated External Loopback.  
Starting and Stopping a Test  
Use this procedure to start, monitor, or abort specific tests. To abort all active  
tests on all interfaces, see Aborting All Tests.  
When the status of a test is . . .  
The only command available is . . .  
Inactive  
Active  
Start  
Stop  
Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure.  
" Procedure  
To start and stop a loopback or a set-pattern test:  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Test  
2. Select an interface and test (e.g., Network or Data Port PVC Tests) and  
press Enter.  
The selected test screen appears. Startappears in the Command column.  
Inactiveappears in the Status column.  
3. Select the Port number and press Enter.  
4. Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected.  
The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available  
test. Start is highlighted.  
5. Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter.  
Stop now appears and is highlighted, and the status of the test changes to  
Active.  
6. Press Enter to stop the test.  
Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive.  
7. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Aborting All Tests  
Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on  
all interfaces, with exception to DTE-initiated loopbacks. To abort individual tests  
that are active, see Starting and Stopping a Test.  
" Procedure  
To abort all tests on all interfaces:  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Test  
2. Select Abort All Tests and press Enter.  
Command Completeappears when all tests on all interfaces have been  
stopped.  
NOTE:  
Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE-initiated loopbacks.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
PVC Tests  
PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface.  
H
When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices,  
they are nondisruptive to data, so user data can continue to be sent during a  
test.  
H
If the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device, PVC tests  
are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data. Also, the Connectivity test  
would not appear.  
Loopback, and send/monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the  
selected DLCI. FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit. If a  
PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit, the other end can send and  
monitor pattern tests.  
The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with the  
multiplexed DLCI 550 selected. If a standard DLCI was selected, (Disruptive),  
rather than (Non-Disruptive), would be displayed after Test. Also, the  
Connectivity test would not appear.  
PVC Tests Screen Example  
main/test/network_pvc  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
5/26/1999 23:32  
NETWORK PVC TESTS  
DLCI Number: 550  
Test (Non-Disruptive)  
Command  
Status  
Result  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
PVC Loopback:  
Send Pattern:  
Monitor Pattern:  
Start  
Start  
Start  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Sequence Errors 99999+  
Data Errors 99999+  
RndTrip Time (ms) 99999  
Connectivity:  
Start  
Inactive  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu  
MainMenu  
Exit  
NOTE:  
Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs  
in the two FrameSaver units. If errors are detected, verify the CIR  
configuration and retest.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
PVC Loopback  
The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per-PVC  
basis. This test logically (not physically) loops back frames received from another  
FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device.  
Main Menu → Test → Network PVC Tests → PVC Loopback  
Network PVC Loopback  
DTE  
PVC #x  
Network  
PVC #x  
98-16186  
Main Menu → Test → Data Port PVC Tests → PVC Loopback  
Port PVC Loopback  
DTE  
PVC #x  
Network  
PVC #x  
98-16187  
Send Pattern  
This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence  
number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device.  
To send a pattern test on a link:  
Main Menu → Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests] →  
Send Pattern  
If the selected  
DLCI is configured as . . .  
And the default  
Rate (kbps) setting is . . .  
Then . . .  
Standard  
(Disruptive)appears  
after Test  
100% of CIR  
10% of CIR  
Multiplexed  
(Non-Disruptive)  
appears after Test  
If the CIR is zero, the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Monitor Pattern  
This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence  
number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device.  
To monitor a pattern test on a link:  
Main Menu → Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests] →  
Monitor Pattern  
The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result  
column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync. An Out of Syncmessage  
appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence.  
These error counts are updated every second. If the maximum count is reached,  
99999+appears in these fields.  
Connectivity  
Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver  
device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active. This test stops  
automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs.  
To run a connectivity test on a link:  
Main Menu → Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests] →  
Connectivity  
Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of  
the PVC. A RndTrip Time(ms)message appears in the Result column when a  
response is received within 5 seconds, indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the  
remote end is alive (operational and connected), and the round trip (RT) time is  
shown in milliseconds (ms), with a resolution of 1 ms. If a response is not  
received within 5 seconds, No Responseappears in the Result column.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Physical Tests  
A FrameSaver 9124 unit’s physical tests screen for the network interface is  
shown below.  
Main Menu → Test → [Network Physical Tests/Data Port Physical Tests/  
DSX-1 Physical Tests]  
Physical Tests Screen Example  
main/test/network  
Device Name: Node A  
9124-II  
5/26/1999 23:32  
NETWORK 1 PHYSICAL TESTS  
Test  
Command  
Status  
Results  
Local Loopbacks  
Line Loopback:  
Payload Loopback:  
Repeater Loopback:  
Start  
Start  
Start  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Inactive  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
Remote Loopbacks  
Send Line Loopback: Down  
Send  
Inactive  
0:00:00  
Pattern Tests  
Send:  
user-defined0a0a  
Stop  
Stop  
Active  
Active  
0:00:00 - Errors 99999+  
0:00:00 - Errors 99999+  
Monitor:user-defined0a0a  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit  
InjectErr ResetMon  
The ResetMon function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a  
Monitor 511 test pattern is Active. Select ResetMon to reset the monitor pattern  
error counter.  
CAUTION:  
You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached;  
you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test  
equipment.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Line Loopback  
The Line Loopback (LLB) loops the information received on the selected interface  
back to the source of the loopback. When used with a pattern test at the remote  
node, LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1  
facility.  
Main Menu → Test → Network Physical Tests → Line Loopback  
Framer  
Other  
The T1  
Interface  
All  
1s  
LLB  
T1  
Interface  
97-15336  
CAUTION:  
This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to  
the selected port. While in loopback, the frame relay link will be down  
so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted.  
An LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:  
H
H
H
Payload Loopback, Send Remote Line Loopback, or an active Monitor  
Pattern on this network interface.  
Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DS0s assigned to this  
network interface.  
Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous  
data port.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Payload Loopback  
The Payload Loopback (PLB) loops the information received on the selected  
interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit  
framing section of the device. Use the PLB to determine whether the problem is  
with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device.  
Main Menu → Test → Network Physical Tests → Payload Loopback  
Framer  
Other  
The T1  
Interface  
All  
1s  
T1  
Interface  
PLB  
97-15337  
CAUTION:  
This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to  
the selected port. While in loopback, the frame relay link will be down  
so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted.  
A PLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:  
H
H
H
Line Loopback, Repeater Loopback, Send Remote Line Loopback, or an  
active Monitor Pattern on this network interface.  
Payload or Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DS0s assigned  
to this network interface.  
Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous  
data port.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Repeater Loopback  
The Repeater Loopback (RLB) loops data received from the data ports and the  
DSX-1 interface after the signal has passed through the framing circuitry. Use  
RLB to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent over  
the interface. This helps to indicate that the FrameSaver unit is operational.  
Main Menu → Test → Network Physical Tests → Repeater Loopback  
An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be  
looped back.  
Framer  
Other  
The T1  
Interface  
RLB  
T1  
Interface  
AIS  
97-15338  
The T1 NAM will not respond to any messages from the network during this test.  
CAUTION:  
This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to  
the selected port. While in loopback, the frame relay link will be down  
so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted.  
An RLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:  
H
Payload Loopback, Send Remote Line Loopback, or an active Monitor  
Pattern on this network interface.  
H
H
All loopbacks on the DSX-1 interface.  
Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous  
data port.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
DTE Loopback  
The DTE external Loopback (DTLB) test loops the received signal on a DTE  
interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports.  
Use this test for isolating problems on the DTE interface.  
An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back.  
Network  
Interface  
DSX  
Interface  
All 1s  
DTLB  
DTLB  
DTE  
Port 2  
DTE  
Port 1  
98-16190  
This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to  
the selected port. Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be  
disrupted.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Send Line Loopback  
The remote Line Loopback (LLB) up and down codes are in-band codes that  
allow control of a remote device. The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the  
remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback.  
Network loopbacks are defined in AT&T TR 62411.  
Main Menu → Test → Network Physical Tests → Send Line Loopback  
A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:  
H
H
Any Loopback on the same interface.  
Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous  
data port.  
H
Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface.  
" Procedure  
To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback:  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Test → Network Physical Tests  
2. Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field.  
— Up – Puts a remote device in loopback.  
— Down – Takes the remote device out of loopback.  
3. Highlight Send and press Enter to start the test. The code is sent for  
10 seconds.  
4. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link  
A network-initiated Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) that loops data over the  
frame relay link (DS0s) received on the network interface through the  
FrameSaver unit’s framing circuitry and back to the same interface.  
A DCLB can be controlled over the frame relay link using one of the following  
in-band methods:  
H
H
V.54 Loopback.  
ANSI T1.403 Annex B Fractional T1 (FT1) Channel Loopback.  
The frame relay service provider can use DCLB to verify the integrity of the frame  
relay circuit.  
Framer  
Other  
The T1  
Interface  
T1  
All  
DCLB  
Interface 1s  
98-16223  
CAUTION:  
V.54 and FT1 Loopbacks may affect the operation of the frame relay  
PVCs assigned to the selected port. While in loopback, the frame relay  
link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will  
be disrupted.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Send Remote Line Loopback  
The remote Line Loopback (LLB) up and down codes are in-band codes that  
allow control of a remote device. The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the  
remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback.  
Network loopbacks are defined in AT&T TR 62411.  
A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active:  
H
H
Any Loopback on the same interface.  
Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port  
(Port Use set to Synchronous) assigned to this interface.  
H
Send V.54 or FT1 Loopback, or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous  
data port (Port Use set to Synchronous) and assigned to this network  
interface.  
H
Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface.  
" Procedure  
To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback:  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Test → Network Physical Tests  
2. Select the desired Network interface (shown in the screen title).  
3. Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field.  
— Up – Puts a remote device in loopback.  
— Down – Takes the remote device out of loopback.  
4. Highlight Send and press Enter to start the test. The code is sent for  
10 seconds.  
5. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Send and Monitor Pattern Tests  
The pattern tests enable a FrameSaver unit to either send or monitor a known bit  
pattern. These tests generate industry-standard bit patterns that can be used to  
determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit.  
The following test patterns are available:  
— QRSS  
— All-zeros  
— All-ones  
— 1-in-8  
— 3-in-24  
— 63  
— 511  
— 2047  
15  
— 2E15-1 (2 -1)  
20  
— 2E20-1 (2 -1)  
— User-defined 2-byte test pattern (a0a0)  
A Send Pattern test cannot be started when the following tests are running:  
H
H
Any Loopback on the same interface.  
Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous  
data port.  
" Procedure  
To send and monitor a Pattern Test:  
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:  
Main Menu → Test →[Network Physical Tests/DSX-1 Physical Tests]  
2. Select the desired pattern in the Send or Monitor field. If sending/monitoring  
a user-defined pattern, enter the the desired 2-byte hexadecimal value in the  
field next to Send or Monitor.  
When sending a pattern, the Inject ERR function key appears. Use Inject  
ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern.  
3. Highlight the Send command to send a pattern, or the Start command to  
monitor a pattern, and press Enter to start the test or start monitoring it.  
4. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column.  
An error count is also displayed. When monitoring a pattern, the ResetMon  
virtual function key appears. ResetMon resets the error count to zero.  
5. Highlight Stop and press Enter to stop the test.  
6. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
IP Ping Test  
An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and  
any FrameSaver unit, router, or NMS to which it has a route.  
Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are:  
H
To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit  
in the network to verify that the path is operational. Select Procedure 1 to  
Ping any far-end FrameSaver unit.  
H
To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver  
unit and the central site NMS. During a remote site installation, an IP Ping  
test is typically run from the remote site to Ping the NMS at the central site.  
The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured,  
and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS. Select  
Procedure 2 to Ping the NMS at the central site.  
H
To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central  
site FrameSaver unit. The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the  
SNMP trap managers to be sent the Ping. Select Procedure 2 to Ping the  
SNMP trap managers.  
" Procedure 1  
To Ping any far-end FrameSaver unit:  
1. Select the IP Ping test.  
Main Menu → Test → IP Ping  
2. Enter the IP Address of the device the Ping is being sent to, then select Start.  
NOTE:  
If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized, or the far-end unit has just  
initialized, it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via  
the proprietary RIP.  
3. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.  
— While the test is running, In Progress... is displayed in the Status  
field.  
— When the test is finished, Alive. Latency = nn msshould appear  
as the Status (nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds).  
If any other message is displayed, additional testing will be required.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
6-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
" Procedure 2  
To Ping the NMS at the central site:  
1. Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address in its  
routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.  
2. Verify that the central site NMS’s router has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address  
in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.  
3. Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap  
Manager if the router is to route data, so a route has been configured within  
the FrameSaver unit.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
SNMP Traps  
Or, for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router,  
verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured.  
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →  
Node IP → Default IP Destination  
Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC  
Multiplexing is used, as when using the Auto-Configuration feature.  
4. Select the IP Ping test.  
Main Menu → Test → IP Ping  
5. Enter the IP Address of the central-site NMS, then select Start.  
6. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.  
— While the test is running, In Progress... is displayed in the Status  
field.  
— When the test is finished, Alive. Latency = nn msshould appear  
as the Status (nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds).  
If any other message is displayed, additional testing will be required.  
Lamp Test  
The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and  
functioning properly. All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1/2  
second during execution of the test. When the test is stopped, the LEDs are  
restored to their normal condition.  
Main Menu → Test → Lamp Test  
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set, the  
Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires. See Test Timeout Feature for  
additional information.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
6-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up OpenLane for  
FrameSaver Devices  
7
This chapter includes:  
H
H
H
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices  
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System  
Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support  
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices  
Paradyne’s OpenLane Service Level Management (SLM) system supports all  
FrameSaver and FrameSaver SLV devices with the following features:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Web and database services  
Web access to health and status information  
Web access to real-time, as well as historical graphs and reports  
Web access to SLV reports  
On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices  
SNMP polling and reporting  
Web-based diagnostic tests: end-to-end, PVC loopbacks, connectivity, and  
physical interface tests  
H
H
Basic device configuration, including RMON alarm and threshold  
configuration  
Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery of SLV devices with their  
SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled  
H
H
H
Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network  
Device reset capability  
HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web  
interface  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices  
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System  
Instructions for installing Paradyne’s OpenLane Service Level Management  
(SLM) System can be found in the following documents:  
H
H
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for UNIX  
Quick Start Installation Instructions  
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for Windows NT  
Quick Start Installation Instructions  
See Product-Related Documents in About This Guide for document numbers.  
Select the appropriate document. In addition to installation instructions, these  
documents include instructions for:  
H
H
H
H
Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services.  
Accessing the OpenLane application.  
Adding a FrameSaver device.  
Adding a Customer ID.  
The OpenLane SLM System has an extensive Help system. For additional  
information refer to the following sources:  
H
H
For UNIX users – Refer to the readme.txt file for distributed infrastructure  
details, and the online Help for operational details.  
For Windows NT users – Refer to the online Help.  
Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support  
With the OpenLane SLM system’s extensive online Help system, the application  
is self-documenting and you have access to the most current system information.  
" Procedure  
To set up FrameSaver SLV support:  
1. Start the OpenLane services, then access the application.  
2. Enter a Customer ID for access to customer profiles, frame relay access  
facilities components, and PVC components.  
3. Add FrameSaver devices.  
4. Create customer profiles.  
5. Set up historical data collection.  
6. Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data.  
See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps  
and for additional information.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus  
for FrameSaver Devices  
8
This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to  
FrameSaver SLV devices. It includes the following:  
H
H
Before Getting Started  
Configuring NetScout Manager Plus  
— Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network  
— Verifying Domains and Groups  
— Correcting Domains and Groups  
— Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template  
— Editing Alarms  
— Adding SLV Alarms Manually  
— Creating History Files  
— Installing the User-Defined History Files  
Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data  
H
H
H
Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus  
Statistical Windows Supported  
Release 5.5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides  
FrameSaver SLV-specific support.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Before Getting Started  
Before getting started, you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a  
NetScout Manager Plus user directory. OpenLane provides these directories as  
a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files. A template of  
alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating  
history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available.  
OpenLane paradyne directories include the following:  
H
H
H
Properties:  
paradyne.fsd file found in OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory  
Properties:  
paradyne.fst file found in OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory  
Alarms:  
slvtemplate.fctfile found in  
OpenLane/netscout/alarms/directory  
H
User history:  
pd*.udhfiles found in OpenLane/netscout/userHistory/directory  
These files should be moved to $NSHOME/usrso they can be used.  
See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template and Creating History Files for  
additional information.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Configuring NetScout Manager Plus  
For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear, make sure your  
environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file. You  
need to:  
H
H
H
H
H
Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory.  
Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager.  
Configure agent properties.  
Verify and correct domains and groups.  
Monitor the agent and DLCIs.  
Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing  
and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus, refer  
to the:  
H
H
NetScout Manager/Plus User Guide to help you install the application,  
monitor traffic, and diagnose emerging problems on network segments.  
NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you  
configure agents, remote servers, and report templates using the various  
NetScout products.  
H
NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between  
the FrameSaver unit and its router, and configure the probe on network  
segments you want to monitor.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network  
" Procedure  
1. Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window.  
2. Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar (on the  
left side of the window).  
A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the  
Name and IP Address headings. If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus  
installation, the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are  
configured yet.  
3. Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar (to the far  
right of the screen). Applicable configuration and administration icons appear  
in the box below the application bar.  
4. Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main  
window.  
5. Select the Add... button (down the center of the screen).  
6. Minimally, enter the following:  
— Agent name  
— IP address  
— Properties File: Select paradyne.  
7. Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent, discover  
its DLCIs, and return to the Configuration Manager main window.  
The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box, with its  
DLCIs in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen.  
8. Select the Test button (fourth button down, center of the screen) to make sure  
you can communicate with the agent.  
Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout  
Server Administrator Guide for additional information.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Verifying Domains and Groups  
" Procedure  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
2. Verify that only FrameSaver SLV-supported domains appear listed in the  
Domain column. FrameSaver SLV-supported domains include:  
— ATALK  
— DECNET  
— IP  
— IPX  
— RMON  
— SNA  
— NETB  
— NET~  
— OSI  
— VINES  
— IPV6  
3. Verify that:  
— S (statistics collection) appears for each domain listed in the Group  
column.  
— H (hosts) appears for the IP domain only.  
— Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column.  
— Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns.  
— Dashes appear under all Logging columns: Stat, Host, Conv.  
4. If all these requirements are met, no further action is required. Close the  
Configuration Manager window.  
If all these requirements are not met, a FrameSaver SLV-supported domain  
needs to be added, or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted, the  
Properties File must be edited.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Correcting Domains and Groups  
Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne-provided file and  
when:  
H
H
H
An unsupported domain needs to be deleted.  
A missing domain needs to be added.  
Groups, Samples, Interval, and Logging are not configured as specified in  
Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups.  
" Procedure  
1. Select the the Property... button (down the center of the Configuration  
Manager main window). The Property Editor window opens.  
2. To delete an unsupported domain, click on the domain from the Domains list,  
then select the Delete button.  
The Are you sure?prompt appears. Select Yes. The unsupported domain  
disappears from the list.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
3. To add a FrameSaver SLV-supported domain or correct property settings,  
select the Edit... button (to the right of the Domain section of the Property  
Editor window). The Edit Domain window opens.  
4. Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following:  
Property  
Description  
Setting  
Groups  
Stats (S)  
Hosts (H)  
Statistics collection  
Enabled for all domains.  
Level 3 information  
(network)  
Enabled for IP domain only.  
Disabled for all other  
domains.  
Conversations (C) Protocols being used  
Event logging  
Disabled for all domains.  
Logging  
Disabled for all domains and  
groups.  
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to apply the changes.  
Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager/Plus &  
NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template  
Once DLCIs have been discovered, SLV alarms should be configured and  
assigned to each DLCI. OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms.  
DLCI alarms can be configured manually, but using the Paradyne alarm defaults  
template greatly reduces configuration time.  
The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB:  
— Frames Sent (SLVFramesSnt)  
— Rx DLCI Utilization (SLVrxDLCIUtil)  
— Tx CIR Utilization (SLVTxCIRUtil)  
— Frames Sent Above CIR  
(SLVFramesTxAbvCIR)  
— Tx DLCI Utilization (SLVTxDLCIUtil) — Average Latency (AverageLatency)  
— Frames Received (SLVFramesRec) — Current Latency (CurrentLatency)  
These alarms and current values can be found in $NSHOME/usr/slvtemplate.fct,  
which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms. This file can be copied  
and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values.  
The copied .fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all  
DLCIs on the unit using the eztrap utility. All .fct files must be in $NSHOME/usr.  
To configure alarms manually, see Adding SLV Alarms Manually.  
NOTE:  
Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure  
below. If you have an NT system, please install Perl before proceeding.  
" Procedure  
1. Open a terminal window and go to $NSHOME/usr.  
2. Type eztrap -i filename.fct -o agentname.fct agentname and press Enter to  
run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCIs for the  
copied .fct file.  
The message eztrap doneappears when the .fct file is transferred.  
3. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
4. Edit any alarm values that need to be changed.  
5. Select the Install button (down the center of the Configuration Manager  
main window) to load alarms for the unit. This may take some time, so  
please be patient.  
See Editing Alarms if any default settings need to be changed.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Editing Alarms  
" Procedure  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
2. Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area (in the upper  
right of the window), then Property... (down the center of the screen).  
The Custom Property Editor window opens.  
3. Select a DLCI from the Trap list, and select the Edit... button (to the right of  
the list).  
The Edit Trap window opens.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
4. Edit any trap defaults that may be required. See Step 4 of Adding SLV  
Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change.  
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to apply your changes.  
The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears.  
6. Select the Install button (down the center of the Configuration Manager main  
window) to apply your changes.  
Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server  
Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Adding SLV Alarms Manually  
Once DLCIs have been discovered, SLV alarms should be defined and assigned  
to each DLCI.  
When configuring alarms manually, every alarm must be configured for each  
DLCI; that is, if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCIs, 160 trap configurations  
must be created (8 x 20). For this reason, it is recommended that the OpenLane  
defaults be used. Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually.  
To load OpenLane default settings for alarms, see Adding SLV Alarms Using a  
Template.  
" Procedure  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay and  
Admin radio buttons still selected, click on the Config Manager icon to open  
the Configuration Manager main window.  
2. Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area (in the upper  
right of the window), then Property... (down the center of the screen).  
The Custom Property Editor window opens (see the window in Editing  
Alarms).  
3. Select a DLCI from the Trap list, and select the Add... button (to the right of  
the list). The Add Trap window opens.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
4. Click on the ... button to the right of indicated fields for a drop-down list from  
which selections can be made. Minimally, configure the following fields:  
Field  
Select or Enter . . .  
Domain  
DLCI  
User Defined  
DLCI number for trap being assigned  
PARADYNE  
Stats Type  
Trap Variable  
Key1  
Trap variable to be configured  
The ifIndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1  
DLCI number (same as DLCI above)  
Key2  
1
Type  
Absolute or Delta radio button  
2
Rising, Falling, or Both radio button  
Threshold  
Value that will trigger a trap.  
1
Latency MIB variables should be Absolute; all others should be Delta.  
Generally, Rising is selected.  
2
5. Select the OK button (at the bottom of the screen) to add this alarm.  
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCIs.  
Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server  
Administrator Guide for additional information.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Creating History Files  
Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for  
each interface. An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface.  
A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored.  
Additional user history tables are created using the command-line prompt in  
NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs (Object IDs) to be  
monitored into the unit.  
OpenLane provides several useful examples, including three files containing a  
complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored: one for a  
DLCI, one for a frame relay link, and one containing system-type OIDs. Any of  
these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files  
specific to the FrameSaver unit.  
These files have a pdn*.udh(user-defined history) format and are found in the  
OpenLane/netscout/userHistory directory. The userHistory files should be  
moved to $NSHOME/usrso they can be used.  
A separate *.udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be  
monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded. Use a text editor  
to create these *.udh files by:  
H
H
Copying one of the interface-specific files (DLCI or link) and editing it using  
one of the examples provided as a guide.  
Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the  
FrameSaver unit.  
CAUTION:  
Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the  
unit, UserHistory1 and UserHistory2. These files must not be modified.  
These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports.  
It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCIs before starting to be  
sure your agent and DLCI lists are current. To rediscover agents and their DLCIs,  
select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window (the  
FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected).  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
" Procedure  
1. Open a terminal window and go to $NSHOME/usr.  
2. Copy an example or interface-specific file to a new file that contains the user  
history table number.  
3. Open the new file using a text editor.  
The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs (Object IDs). The frame  
relay interface number 101015001 must replace @IFN, and the DLCI number  
to be monitored must replace @DLCI.  
Example: frCircuitSentFrames  
Change “1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.@IFN.@DLCI”  
to “1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.101015001.301”  
The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver 9124 model is 101015001.  
4. Edit the new file, as needed.  
Refer to Creating .UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager  
Plus User Guide for additional information.  
See Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Default, for OID  
information for an interface.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Installing the User-Defined History Files  
Once the user-defined history files have been created, the files need to be  
installed. History files are installed from the command-line prompt in NetScout  
Manager Plus. Should the FrameSaver unit be reset, these files will need to be  
reinstalled. The command used to install a new user history table is located in  
$NSHOME/bin.  
CAUTION:  
Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2. UserHistory1 and UserHistory2  
are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports.  
Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability.  
" Procedure  
1. Type dvuhist -f agentname user_history_table_number config  
number_of_buckets interval download_file.udh to load user-defined history  
files for the frame relay link.  
Example:  
dvuhist -f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallas51k.udh  
The interval must be entered in seconds.  
2. Type dvuhist -f “agentname DLCI_number” user_history_table_number  
config number_of_buckets interval download_file.udh to load user-defined  
history files for a specific DLCI.  
Example:  
dvuhist -f “Dallas51 301” 3 config 30 60 Dallas301.udh  
The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI.  
For these examples, user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3  
on the History List.  
See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data to verify that the user-defined  
history files have been loaded.  
Refer to Installing .UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager  
Plus User Guide for additional information.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Monitoring a DLCI’s History Data  
Once the monitoring variables have been defined, a problem DLCI can  
monitored.  
" Procedure  
To monitor user history data:  
1. From the NetScout Manager Plus main window, with the FrameRelay radio  
button still selected, select the Traffic radio button.  
The appropriate icons appear.  
2. Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI  
list box (under the agent list box).  
3. Highlight the DLCI to be monitored.  
4. Click on the Custom History icon. The NetScout Custom History window  
opens.  
Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
5. Select History List from the View menu. The History List window opens.  
The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list.  
6. Highlight the desired set of user history variables, and select the OK button.  
Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables. This may  
take some time, so please be patient.  
7. Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu, if desired (3D Bar is shown).  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected, you can click  
on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data.  
8. Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view (see  
Step 7 of this procedure).  
Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in  
Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional  
information.  
See Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order) in Appendix B, SNMP MIBs  
and Traps, and RMON Alarm Default, to identify OID information being shown.  
Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus  
Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus,  
select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent,  
or one of its DLCIs.  
NOTE:  
Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar  
are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents.  
The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent’s traffic. The procedure  
is the same for protocol monitoring, but you may be prompted to select a Domain  
Group as well as an agent or DLCI.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
" Procedure  
1. Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent, or one of its  
DLCIs.  
2. Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCIs appear in the DLCI  
list box (under the agent list box).  
3. If you want to monitor one of the agent’s DLCIs, highlight the DLCI to be  
monitored.  
4. Click on an applicable icon. The selected graphical report should open.  
Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and  
Domain History. In the example below, the Domain History icon was selected,  
which is actually a real-time report.  
NOTE:  
If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been  
changed via OpenLane, the values shown for the distribution will not be  
accurate. Only default size distributions are tracked.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices  
Statistical Windows Supported  
Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are  
supported for FrameSaver units. For example, All Convs (conversations) and  
TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected, but  
conversations are not supported.  
Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window, the  
following are supported:  
Traffic Statistics  
Traffic Monitor  
Protocol Statistics  
Protocol Monitor  
Protocol Zoom  
TopNTalkers  
Segment Zoom  
1
Segment Details  
1
Domain History  
All Talkers  
1
Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only, not a link. If a link is selected,  
all size distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero.  
When a DLCI is selected, the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for  
FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket  
(i.e., bucket size <64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65..127 bucket, and >1518  
statistics appear in the 1024..1518 bucket).  
Conversations and Long-Term and Short-Term Histories are not supported in this  
release. As a result, no data will appear on windows that include these panes.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Network Health for  
FrameSaver Devices  
9
FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication’s Network Health  
software. In addition, Network Health has released the first in a series of software  
modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its  
reporting package (see the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 9-9). To  
get this report, you need Network Health R4.01 or higher.  
This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver  
SLV devices. It includes the following:  
H
H
H
H
H
Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports  
Discovering FrameSaver Elements  
Configuring the Discovered Elements  
Grouping Elements for Reports  
Generating Reports for a Group  
— About Service Level Reports  
— About At-a-Glance Reports  
— About Trend Reports  
— Printed Reports  
H
Reports Applicable to SLV Devices  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
For additional information about installing, accessing, and managing FrameSaver  
SLV devices through Concord’s Network Health, and for information about  
applicable reports, refer to:  
H
H
H
Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application.  
Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application.  
Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay  
reports.  
H
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand  
and use Traffic Accountant reports.  
Installation and Setup of Network Health  
Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions, and  
follow the instructions applicable to your network platform. Once Network Health  
is installed, you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units.  
Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions, called a  
module. Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those  
features and functions. Make sure you license the Poller application so you can  
poll SLV units and collect data.  
To use this application:  
1. Discover network elements, units, and interfaces in the network.  
2. Configure the Network Health applications, then save them.  
3. Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes.  
4. Set up and run reports.  
Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide.  
The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once  
you have access to the applications.  
See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup  
information and a full discussion of the application’s features and how to use  
them.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Discovering FrameSaver Elements  
Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications, the Discover  
dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and  
discover their DLCIs. Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the  
Poller Configuration, which are used to poll the units.  
IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be  
entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their  
elements. These elements are resources that can be polled (e.g., LAN/WAN  
interfaces, frame relay circuits, routers, and servers).  
The two types of elements that can be polled are:  
H
H
Statistics elements – Provide counters and other gauges for information  
gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis.  
Conversation elements – Provide RMON2 and similar data for information  
gathered about network traffic between nodes.  
" Procedure  
To find SLV device elements in your network:  
1. Select the LAN/WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found.  
Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type.  
2. Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located, and the Community  
String (Community Name in the FrameSaver unit). The Community String is  
case-sensitive.  
3. Select the Discover button.  
The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens,  
showing the results of the discovery process.  
A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of  
existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete.  
Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network, it  
could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all  
elements in the network.  
See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional  
information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to  
the database.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Configuring the Discovered Elements  
Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for  
the first time. For a FrameSaver SLV unit, the speed set would be the unit’s CIR.  
No additional configuration should be required. However, you should verify that all  
appropriate information has been retrieved.  
NOTE:  
If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured, or if it is not configured correctly,  
Network Health sets the unit’s CIR to 0 kbps. For this reason, you should  
reconfigure the unit’s CIR before Network Health polls it. If 0 kbps is the  
speed setting, you will need to edit the unit’s CIR from Network Health.  
Additional information that can be edited, as well. See Discovering Elements in  
the Network Health User Guide for additional information.  
" Procedure  
To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health:  
1. Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering  
dialog box once the discovery process is completed.  
The Poller Configuration window opens.  
2. Double-click on the first element discovered. The Modify Element dialog box  
opens.  
3. In the Speed box, select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the  
unit in the text box.  
Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts (e.g., enter 56 k for 56 kilobits  
per second, or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second).  
4. Apply your changes:  
— Select the Apply/Next button to save your change and bring up the next  
element to be edited. Continue until all newly discovered frame relay  
elements have been modified before selecting the OK button.  
— Select the the OK button.  
The Modify Element dialog box closes.  
5. Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window. The  
modified elements are saved to the database, and the units are polled.  
Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for  
data to be gathered before running any reports.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Grouping Elements for Reports  
Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made, the  
newly discovered elements (DLCIs) should be organized into a group for Health  
reporting. Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node  
types (e.g., all SLV elements). Once grouped, you can then run reports on all  
DLCIs in the network, as well as reports on individual DLCIs.  
" Procedure  
To group elements:  
1. From the console, select Edit Groups from the Reports menu. The Add  
Groups dialog box opens.  
2. Enter a name in the Group Name field. Up to 64 characters can be entered.  
A through Z, a through z, 0 through 9, dashes (–), periods (.), and underscores  
(_ ) can be used. No spaces can be included, and the word All cannot be used.  
3. Select the WAN radio button (above the Available Elements list).  
4. Highlight all the DLCIs listed on the Available Elements list, or select specific  
DLCIs, then select the left arrow button.  
The highlighted DLCIs move from the Available Elements list to the  
Group Members list.  
5. Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the  
Group Members list.  
The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on  
the Groups dialog box.  
See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for  
additional information. That chapter also tells you how to customize reports.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
Generating Reports for a Group  
Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCIs  
and the DLCIs have been grouped, you can start generating reports. When  
selecting a report Section, select WAN from the drop-down list. See Running  
Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional  
information. That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report  
generation.  
NOTE:  
Network Health provides information with each chart or table, generally  
referred to as a report. Click on the hyperlink (Explanation of...) for an  
explanation of the report and its features. You can also refer to the Network  
Health Reports Guide.  
About Service Level Reports  
For long-term analysis and reporting, you will want to license the Service Level  
Reports application. This application analyzes data collected over months, or by  
quarters, and provides service level information about an enterprise, a region,  
department, or business process. Executive, IT Manager, and Customer Service  
Level reports are provided.  
Using these reports, you can measure service performance against goals and  
agreements. Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables:  
availability, bandwidth, bytes, health exceptions, and latency. These ranges need  
to be set before reports are scheduled.  
About At-a-Glance Reports  
At-a-Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network  
performance indicators onto a single page. Up to ten DLCIs can be included in an  
At-a-Glance Report.  
Using the FrameSaver SLV report on page 9-9, you can compare a DLCI’s  
volume with the network’s performance over a specified period of time. Ranges  
for service level goals can be set for up to five variables: availability, bandwidth,  
bytes, health exceptions, and latency. These ranges need to be set before reports  
are scheduled. In addition, all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV  
device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of  
the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer’s utilization on  
network efficiency.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
About Trend Reports  
By specifying specific variables like bandwidth, trend analysis can be performed  
and shown on Trend Reports. Up to ten variables for a DLCI, or ten DLCIs on one  
variable can be generated on a single trend report. Information can be presented  
in a line graph, pie chart, bar chart, or table format. Any amount of time can be  
specified for the reporting period.  
These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health  
Index rating. See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index  
ratings.  
Printed Reports  
All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports.  
Reports Applicable to SLV Devices  
The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units:  
H
Exception Reports – Provide summary and detail information that identifies  
DLCIs with the highest incidence of errors, high bandwidth utilization, and  
trends.  
These reports identify those DLCIs that have exceeded a specified number of  
accumulated exception points. It is a good idea to run this report daily so that  
DLCIs having the most problems can be attended to first. DLCIs contained on  
this report need immediate attention.  
If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports, check whether any new  
equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly  
configured. If its configuration is correct, the equipment could be faulty.  
H
Summary Reports – Provide summary information for the network, volume  
and error leaders, and DLCI traffic.  
— Network Summary Report – Provides an overall view of the network.  
Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into  
problems.  
— Leaders Summary Report – Identifies DLCIs having the highest volume  
and errors. High traffic volume may be increasing latency, and the high  
Health Index rating indicates problems. It is a good idea to run these  
reports daily so a norm can be established. The same DLCIs should  
appear.  
Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems. Problems to  
look for include: a normally high-volume DLCI is dropped from the list, a  
new DLCI appears on the list (check Element Summaries), a DLCI has a  
high Health Index rating, but low volume, significant differences between  
a DLCI’s average and peak Health Index rating.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
— Elements Summary Report – Compares DLCI traffic with volume and  
the baseline, bandwidth utilization, and errors.  
Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison, to identify  
DLCIs with above or below average volume so they can be investigated  
when there are any significant changes.  
H
H
Supplemental Report – Shows DLCI availability and latency. The  
information shown in this report is also on other Health reports. However,  
these charts show more than ten DLCIs at a time so you have a broader view  
of the service provided by the network.  
Service Level Reports – Provide summary information for a group list for a  
longer reporting period than other reports.  
— Executive Service Level Report – Provides service level performance  
for an enterprise on a single page. Use this report to assess whether IT  
service levels are meeting availability and service goals.  
— IT Manager Service Level Report – Provides service level information  
for various groups. Using this report, you can compare service level  
performance of various groups. The report summarizes service levels for  
a group of DLCIs, along with details on individual DLCIs within that  
group.  
— Customer Service Level Report – Provides service level information for  
customers. This report is used to provide service level information to  
service customers to help them determine optimum service levels  
needed based upon their own traffic data, as well as provide documented  
evidence for increasing CIR. It combines daily volume, daily Health  
exceptions, bandwidth distribution, average Health Index ratings and  
availability for each DLCI onto a single page.  
H
At-a-Glance Reports – Provides consolidated DLCI and network  
performance information onto a single page.  
— At-a-Glance Report – Consolidates bandwidth utilization, network traffic,  
events occurring over the reporting period, and availability and latency  
levels information. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a  
trend report (e.g., burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be  
generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions  
Reports, Supplemental Reports, and Health reports.  
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high  
Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem  
leading to a DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.  
— FrameSaver SLV Plus At-a-Glance Report – Performs trend analysis  
on up to ten specified variables for DLCIs (see page 9-9 for an  
example). This is the first Network Health report to integrate  
the FrameSaver SLV’s unique monitoring capabilities, using the unit’s  
SLV-enhanced network statistics.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
H
Trend Reports – Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for  
DLCIs. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report  
(e.g., burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when  
investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports, Supplemental  
Reports, and Health reports.  
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health  
Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a  
DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.  
See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices  
This page intentionally left blank.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Hierarchy  
A
Menus  
The following is a graphical representation of the FrameSaver SLV 9124 unit’s  
menu organization.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu Hierarchy  
Menu Hierarchy  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Status  
System and Test Status  
LMI Reported DLCIs  
PVC Connection Status  
Timeslot Assignment Status  
Performance Statistics  
Display LEDs  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
and Control Leads  
Identity  
System and  
Test Status  
• Self-Test Results  
• Health and  
Status  
LMI  
Reported  
DLCIs  
• DLCI  
• Status  
• CIR (bps)  
PVC Connection Timeslot  
Identity  
• System  
• NAM  
Performance  
Statistics  
• Service Level Verification  
• DLCI  
• Frame Relay  
• ESF Line  
• Clear All Statistics  
Status  
Assignment  
Status  
• Network  
Timeslot Status  
• Source Link,  
DLCI, EDLCI  
• Primary  
Destination Link,  
DLCI, EDLCI,  
Status  
• Test Status  
• DSX-1  
Timeslot Status  
• Clear  
Assignments  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
PVCTests:  
Network  
Data Port  
PhysicalTests:  
Network  
Data Port  
DSX-1  
PVCTests  
(DLCI Number)  
PhysicalTests  
• Local Loopbacks  
• Remote Loopbacks  
• Send/Monitor Pattern Tests  
Other:  
IP Ping  
Lamp Test  
Abort All Tests  
• PVC Loopback  
• Send Pattern  
• Monitor Pattern  
• Connectivity  
99-16345a  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Hierarchy  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Load  
Configuration  
from:  
Test  
Configuration  
Edit/Display  
System  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Network  
DSX-1  
Data Ports  
Time Slot Assignment  
PVC Connections  
Management and  
Communication  
Network and  
Data Ports  
• Physical  
• Frame Relay  
• DLCI Records  
Time Slot  
Assignment  
• Frame Relay To  
Network Assignments  
• DSX-1 To Network  
Assignments  
System  
PVC Connection  
Table  
• Source Link, DLCI,  
EDLCI  
• Primary Destination  
Link, DLCI, EDLCI  
Management and  
Communication Options  
• Node IP  
• Management PVCs  
• General SNMP Management  
• Telnet and FTP Session  
• SNMP NMS Security  
• SNMP Traps  
• Frame Relay and LMI  
• Service Level  
Verification  
• General  
• Clear Assignments  
New or Modify  
• Communication Port  
• External Modem (Com Port)  
PVC Connection  
Entry  
New or Modify  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Management  
PVC Entry  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
• Frame Relay Discovery Mode  
• Automatic Circuit Removal  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
MAIN MENU  
Status  
Test  
Configuration  
Auto-Configuration  
Control  
Control  
Modem Call Directories  
System Information  
Administer Logins  
Change Operating Mode  
Select Software Release  
LMI Packet Capture Utility  
Disconnect Modem  
Reset Device  
System Information  
Administer Logins  
Select Software Release  
LMI Packet Capture Utility  
• Device Name  
• System Name,  
Location, Contact  
• Date  
• Login ID  
• Password  
• Access Level  
• Current Release  
• Alternate Release  
• Switch & Reset  
• Capture Interface  
• Packet Capture Start/Stop  
• Status  
• Packets in Buffer  
• Time  
New  
Display LMI Trace Log  
LMI Trace Log  
Login Entry  
99-16345b  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Hierarchy  
This page intentionally left blank.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and  
RMON Alarm Defaults  
B
This appendix contains the following:  
H
H
H
MIB Support  
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps  
System Group (mib-2)  
— FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1)  
— FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2)  
Interfaces Group (mib-2)  
H
H
— Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
— NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps  
— Trap: warmStart  
— Trap: authenticationFailure  
— Traps: linkUp and linkDown  
— Traps: enterprise-Specific  
— Traps: RMON-Specific  
H
H
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults  
— Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
— Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults  
— DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area  
— DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area  
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order)  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
MIB Support  
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1, and has the capability of  
being managed by any industry-standard SNMP manager and accessed by  
external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol.  
The following MIBs are supported:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
MIB II (RFC 1213 and RFC 1573)  
Frame Relay DTEs MIB (RFC 2115)  
DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)  
RS-232-Like MIB (RFC 1659)  
Frame Relay Service MIB (RFC 1604)  
Enterprise MIB  
RMON Version 1 MIB (RFC 1757)  
RMON Version 2 MIB (RFC 2021)  
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps  
Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World  
Wide Web site.  
" Procedure  
To access Paradyne MIBs:  
1. Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www.paradyne.com.  
2. Select Technical Support.  
3. Select Management Information Base (MIBs).  
The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS  
application software. Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional  
download information.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
System Group (mib-2)  
This section provides the system description and system object identifier for the  
System Group for the FrameSaver 9124 unit, which is an SNMPv1 MIB.  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1)  
The following is the system description (sysDescr [system 1]) for the NMS  
subsystem in the FrameSaver 9124 unit:  
PARADYNE T1 FrameSaver SLV; Model: 9124-II; S/W Release: (MM.mm.bb  
[MM=Major.mm=minor.bb=build] format); NAM CCA number: (hardware  
version in hhhh-hhh format); Serial number: sssssss  
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2)  
The following is the system object identifier (sysObjectID [system 2]), or OID, for  
the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver 9124 unit:  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.4.9  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Interfaces Group (mib-2)  
Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group, as defined in RFC 1573 and  
RFC 1213, which is an SNMPv1 MIB, is provided in this section.  
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
The following table provides the ifName for each interface type, the ifDescr, and  
the ifIndex that Paradyne has assigned to each.  
Table B-1. Paradyne Interface Objects Information  
ifName  
Description  
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)  
ifIndex  
Physical Layer  
Network T1  
T1 network interface  
DSX-1 interface  
Network T1; T1 FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
101001001  
101002001  
DSX-1 T1  
DSX-1 T1; T1 FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
Sync Data Port Synchronous Data  
Synchronous Data Port, Slot: 1, 101003001  
Port: 1; T1 FR NAM; Hardware  
Version: hhhh-hhh  
S01P1  
Port-1  
COM  
Communications port  
COM Port; T1 FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
101004001  
Frame Relay Logical Layer  
FR UNI Frame relay logical  
101015001  
For the DTE side:  
link on the T1 network  
interface  
Network T1 of FR DTE;  
T1 FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
For the DCE side:  
Network T1 of FR SERVICE;  
T1 FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
Frame relay logical  
link on the  
Synchronous Data  
Port-1  
101016001  
For the user side:  
Synchronous Data Port of  
FR DTE, Slot: 1, Port: 1;  
T1 FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
For the network side:  
Synchronous Data Port of  
FR SERVICE, Slot: 1, Port: 1;  
T1 FR NAM; Hardware Version:  
hhhh-hhh  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)  
For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with  
NetScout Probes, use the following ifName, ifDescr, and ifIndex.  
Table B-2. NetScout Interface Objects Information  
ifName  
Description  
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)  
ifIndex  
Frame Relay Logical Layer  
Frame Relay 1 Frame relay logical  
1
For the DTE side:  
Network  
link on the network  
interface  
RMON (IN/OUT); Network T1  
of FR DTE; T1 FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
For the DCE side:  
RMON (IN/OUT); Network T1  
of FR SERVICE; T1 FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
Frame Relay 3 Synchronous Data  
3
For the user side:  
Sync Data  
Port 1  
Port-1  
RMON (IN/OUT); Synchronous  
Data Port of FR DTE, Slot: 1,  
Port: 1; T1 FR NAM; Hardware  
Version: hhhh-hhh  
For the network side:  
RMON (IN/OUT); Synchronous  
Data Port of FR SERVICE,  
Slot: 1, Port: 1; T1 FR NAM;  
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh  
RMON Logical Layer  
RMON Frame  
Relay Logical  
Interfaces  
These values are  
calculated.  
17–48  
OUT – RMON (IN);  
[ifName of the interface]  
H For the DTE:  
(ifIndex –1) * 2 +17  
OUT – RMON (OUT);  
[ifName of the interface]  
H For the DCE: DTE  
calculated value +1  
RMON Virtual  
Interfaces  
These values are  
calculated based on  
the probe’s internal  
circuit index: circuit  
index +65.  
—
65–512  
RMON Virtual  
Logical  
Interfaces  
These values are  
calculated.  
513–1023  
IN – VIRTUAL PVC  
[interface number]  
[DLCI number] DTE  
H For the DTE:  
(virtual interface  
ifIndex –65) * 2  
+513  
OUT – VIRTUAL PVC  
[interface number]  
[DLCI number] DCE  
H For the DCE:  
DTE calculated  
value +1  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps  
This section describes the FrameSaver unit’s compliance with SNMP format  
standards and with its special operational trap features.  
All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap.  
Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing $ifString have the  
following format:  
‘DLCI $dlciNumber “$circuitId” of $ifName frame relay link “$linkName”.’  
— $dlciNumber is the DLCI number. DLCI $dlciNumber “$circuitId” only  
appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap.  
— $circuitId is the name given to the circuit. It can be an empty string, or a  
1– 64 byte string within quotes (e.g., “Chicago to New York”), and only  
appears when a DLCI with “circuitID” is associated with the trap.  
— $linkName is the name given to the link. Frame relay $linkName only  
appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with  
the trap.  
— $ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable.  
Example:  
‘DLCI 100 “Chicago to New York” of Network T1 frame relay link “Net1-FR1”’  
In this example, a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap.  
The unit supports the following traps:  
H
H
H
H
H
warmStart  
authenticationFailure  
linkUp and linkDown  
enterprise-Specific  
RMON-Specific  
These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Trap: warmStart  
This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized.  
Table B-3. warmStart Trap  
Trap  
What It Indicates  
Possible Cause  
warmStart  
H Reset command sent.  
H Power disruption.  
FrameSaver unit has just  
reinitialized and stabilized  
itself.  
String:  
‘Unit reset.’  
Variable-Binding  
devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)  
Trap: authenticationFailure  
This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to  
lack of authentication.  
Table B-4. authenticationFailure Trap  
Trap  
What It Indicates  
Possible Cause  
authenticationFailure  
Access to the FrameSaver  
unit was attempted and  
failed.  
H SNMP protocol message not  
properly authenticated.  
H Three unsuccessful attempts  
were made to enter a correct  
login user ID/password  
combination.  
H IP Address security is enabled  
and a message was received  
from the SNMP Manager  
whose address was not on the  
lost of approved managers.  
String:  
‘Unauthorized access attempted.’  
Variable-Binding  
devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Traps: linkUp and linkDown  
These traps are supported on the following interfaces:  
H
H
Network, DSX-1, and synchronous data ports – Physical sublayer interfaces  
Frame relay logical link layer interfaces  
Table B-5. linkUp and linkDown Traps  
Trap  
What It Indicates  
Possible Cause  
linkDown  
A failure in one of the  
communication interfaces  
has occurred.  
A failure in one of the  
communication interfaces has  
occurred.  
linkUp  
One of the failed  
communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational.  
One of the failed communication  
up and operational.  
Their linkUp and linkDown variable-bindings are in Table B-6.  
Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II  
Interfaces Table. It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension  
MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (1 of 2)  
Interface  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
Physical Sublayer  
Network,  
DSX-1  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H linkDown – One or more alarm  
conditions are active on the  
interface.  
H ifAdminStatus  
(Supported by the  
media-specific DS1  
MIB.)  
(RFC 1573)  
Alarm conditions include:  
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
– Loss of Signal (LOS) or  
far-end loss of signal  
– Out of Frame (OOF)  
– Alarm Indication Signal  
(AIS)  
– Excessive Error Rate (EER)  
– Yellow Alarm  
Strings:  
‘$ifString down.’ No alarms  
exist. (e.g., ‘Network T1 down  
due to yellow alarm.’)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an  
intentional shutdown.)  
H linkUp – No alarms on the  
interface.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
Synchronous  
Data Port  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H linkDown – One or more alarm  
conditions are active on the  
port.  
H ifAdminStatus  
(RFC 1573)  
Alarm conditions include:  
(Supported by the  
media-specific  
RS232-like MIB.)  
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
1
– DTR off  
2
– RTS off  
– ‘’ – Not DTR or RTS, but  
link is down.  
String:  
‘$ifString $alarmString down.’  
(e.g., ‘Sync Data Port S01P1  
DTR and RTS down.’)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an  
intentional shutdown.)  
H linkUp – No alarms on the  
port.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
1
The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE  
supports the DTR lead state.  
2
The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE  
supports the RTS lead state.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (2 of 2)  
Interface  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
Logical Link Sublayer  
Synchronous  
Data Port  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H linkDown – LMI is down for the  
3
LMI Protocol configured, or  
H ifAdminStatus  
Frame Relay link is disabled.  
(RFC 1573)  
‘$ifString LMI down.’ No  
alarms exist on the link.  
(e.g., ‘Sync Data Port S01P1  
frame relay link “Port-1”  
LMI down.’)  
Service Side of the  
Frame Relay UNI  
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
(Supported by the  
media-specific Frame  
Relay Services MIB.)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an  
intentional shutdown.)  
H linkUp – LMI is up or Frame  
Relay link is enabled.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
Network  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H linkDown – LMI is down for the  
3
LMI Protocol configured, or  
H ifAdminStatus  
Frame Relay link is disabled.  
DTE Side of the  
Frame Relay UNI  
(RFC 1573)  
Strings:  
‘$ifString LMI down.’  
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
(Supported by the  
media-specific Frame  
Relay DTE’s MIB.)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an  
intentional shutdown.)  
H linkUp – LMI is up or Frame  
Relay link is enabled.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
3
If the LMI Protocol is not configured, a linkUp/linkDown trap is based solely upon  
whether the interface is enabled or disabled.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Traps: enterprise-Specific  
These traps indicate that an enterprise-specific event has occurred. Supported  
enterprise-specific traps are listed below.  
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (1 of 3)  
Trap  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
enterpriseCIR-  
Change(15)  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
CIR has changed due to the LMI  
report. LMI Protocol is set to  
Standard and the network’s CIR  
changed.  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
(devFrExt.mib)  
String:  
H devFrExtDlciCIR  
‘CIR on $ifString changed to  
$CIR bps.’  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
enterpriseConfig-  
Change(6)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
Configuration has been changed  
via the menu-driven user  
interface, an SNMP Manager,  
or auto-configuration after 60  
seconds has elapsed without  
another change.  
String:  
‘Device configuration change.’  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
enterpriseDLCI-  
delete(17)  
The DLCI has been deleted. The  
network no longer supports the  
DLCI, and it was removed.  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
(devFrExt.mib)  
Strings:  
‘$ifString deleted by Auto-DLCI  
delete.’  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib.)  
enterpriseDLCI-  
Down(11)  
DLCI Status is set to Inactive; the  
DLCI is down.  
Strings:  
‘$ifString down.’ (Due to LMI or  
physical failure.)  
‘$ifString administratively  
shutdown.’ (Due to an intentional  
shutdown.)  
enterpriseDLCIUp(12)  
DLCI Status is set to Active;  
DLCI is up again.  
String:  
‘$ifString up.’  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (2 of 3)  
Trap  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
enterpriseMissedSLV-  
Down(16)  
SLV Timeout Error Event  
Threshold has been exceeded.  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
String:  
(devFrExt.mib)  
‘SLV down on $ifString due to  
excessive SLV packet loss. Total  
SLV packets lost is $numLost.’  
H devFrExtDlciMissed-  
SLVs (devFrExt.mib)  
enterpriseMissedSLV-  
Up(116)  
SLV Timeout Error Event has  
been cleared.  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib.)  
String:  
‘SLV up on $ifString because  
SLV communication was  
reestablished. Total SLV packets  
lost is $numLost.’  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
enterprisePrimary-  
ClockFail(1)  
Operating software has detected  
that the primary clock source has  
failed.  
String:  
‘Primary clock failed.’  
enterprisePrimary-  
ClockFailClear(101)  
Operating software has detected  
that the primary clock source is  
operational again.  
String:  
‘Primary clock restored.’  
enterpriseRMON-  
ResetToDefault(13)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
All RMON-related option  
changes have been reset to their  
default values.  
Default Factory Configuration  
settings have been reloaded,  
returning RMON-related options  
to their original settings.  
String:  
‘RMON database reset to  
defaults.’  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (3 of 3)  
Trap  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
enterpriseSecondary-  
ClockFail(4)  
Operating software has detected  
that the secondary clock source  
has failed.  
String:  
‘Secondary clock failed.’  
enterpriseSecondary-  
ClockFailClear(104)  
Operating software has detected  
that the secondary clock source  
is operational again.  
String:  
‘Secondary clock restored.’  
enterpriseSelfTest-  
Fail(2)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
Unit has completed  
(re)initialization and a hardware  
failure was detected.  
String:  
‘Self test failed: $s.’ ($s is the  
contents of devSelfTestResult.)  
For physical interfaces and  
frame relay links:  
enterpriseTest-  
Start(5)  
At least one test has been  
started on an interface or virtual  
circuit.  
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)  
H .0.0 (placeholder)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib  
String:  
‘$testString test started on  
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘DTE Loopback  
test started on Sync Data Port  
S01P1.’)  
For virtual circuits (DLCIs):  
enterpriseTest-  
Stop(105)  
All tests have been halted on an  
interface or virtual circuit.  
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex  
(devFrExt.mib)  
String:  
H devFrExtDlciDlci  
‘$testString test stopped on  
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘Disruptive PVC  
Loopback test stopped on  
DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port  
S01P1 frame relay.’)  
(devFrExt.mib)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Traps: RMON-Specific  
Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON. See  
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate  
RMON-specific traps.  
Table B-8. RMON-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings  
Trap  
Variable-Bindings  
Possible Cause  
risingAlarm  
H alarmIndex (RFC 1757)  
Object being monitored has risen  
above the set threshold.  
H alarmVariable  
(RFC 1757)  
String:  
‘Change in $variableName  
$typeString threshold of  
$alarmRisingThreshold by  
$(alarmValue –  
AlarmRisingThreshold.’  
(e.g., Octets received on  
Network T1 frame relay rose  
to threshold of 1.’)  
H alarmSampleType  
(RFC 1757)  
H alarmValue (RFC 1757)  
H alarmRisingThreshold or  
alarm Falling Threshold  
(RFC 1757)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
fallingAlarm  
H alarmIndex (RFC 1757)  
Object being monitored has  
fallen below the set threshold.  
H alarmVariable  
(RFC 1757)  
String:  
‘Change in $variableName  
$typeString threshold of  
$alarmFallingThreshold by  
$(alarmValue –  
AlarmFallingThreshold.’  
(e.g., Octets received on  
Network T1 frame relay fell  
to threshold of 1.’)  
H alarmSampleType  
(RFC 1757)  
H alarmValue (RFC 1757)  
H alarmFallingThreshold  
(RFC 1757)  
H devLastTrapString  
(devHealthAndStatus.-  
mib)  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults  
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event  
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold  
set for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap or a log event is sent.  
Event Defaults  
Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit, there is no  
need to define multiple events for each alarm type, so only the following two  
events need to be generated:  
eventIndex eventDescription  
eventType  
eventCommunity  
1
2
Default SLV Rising Event log-and-trap(4)  
Default SLV Falling Event log-and-trap(4)  
0
0
The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default  
alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit, shows the alarm and event types, the  
interval used when generating alarms, and thresholds.  
H
H
H
H
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area  
See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps  
work, and Traps: RMON-Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring.  
Rising Event Operation  
If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table (e.g., frames  
dropped by the network), the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the  
end of the interval. Only one alarm per event per interval is generated. The alarm  
condition persists until the event has been disarmed (reset).  
The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising  
threshold has not been crossed during an interval, allowing the event to return to  
its original disarmed state.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit’s network interface.  
Table B-9. Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Unavailable  
Seconds  
D
MIB: DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)  
Tag: dsx1TotalUASs  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.18.9.1.5.I  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults  
These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit’s frame relay link interfaces. They are  
created during RMON initialization.  
Table B-10. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (1 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Invalid Frames  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.18.I  
Short Frames  
Long Frames  
Rx Discards  
Tx Discards  
D
D
D
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.6.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.7.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.15.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.14.I  
Rx Total Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.20.I  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-10. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (2 of 2)  
Sample  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default  
Falling  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Type  
Tx Total Errors  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.19.I  
Rx Overruns  
Tx Underruns  
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.28.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTx-  
Underruns  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.29.I  
Rx Non-octet Aligns  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRx-  
NonOctet  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.16.I  
Rx CRC Errors  
Total LMI Errors  
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.17.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs Rising  
(15 mins)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotal-  
LMIErrs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.7.1.32.I  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area  
These alarms apply to all DLCIs on the network interface and can be created  
during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created. They are put into the  
Paradyne alarm area.  
Table B-11. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area  
Rising  
Falling  
Threshold Threshold  
Sample  
Type  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Default  
DLCI Inactive  
Seconds  
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs  
(15 mins)  
Rising  
1
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactive-  
Secs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D  
Missing Latency  
Responses  
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs  
(15 mins)  
Rising  
Rising  
5
1
5
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D  
Rx FECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
4.I.D  
Rx BECNs  
D
D
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Rising  
Rising  
Rising  
1
5
1
1
5
1
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
5.I.D  
Congested Seconds  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciSts-  
CongestedSecs  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D  
Frames Dropped by  
Network  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciNetDropFr  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area  
These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is  
created. They are put into the NetScout alarm area. Table B-12 identifies alarm  
defaults that do not change, and Table B-13 identifies alarm defaults that change  
when the interface’s line speed changes.  
The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so  
they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider. Up  
to eight alarms per interface are allowed. Any additional alarms are added to the  
Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software.  
See Editing Alarms in Chapter 8, Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for  
FrameSaver Devices.  
Table B-12. Static DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area (1 of 2)  
Rising  
Falling  
Threshold Threshold  
Sample  
Type  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Default  
Current Latency  
A
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
None  
None  
None  
Must be  
configured.  
0
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D  
Average Latency  
Frames Received  
A
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
900 secs  
(15 mins)  
Must be  
configured.  
0
0
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D  
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Must be  
configured.  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
8.I.D  
Frames Sent  
D
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
None  
None  
Must be  
configured.  
0
0
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
6.I.D  
Tx Frames  
Exceeding CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
Must be  
configured.  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR  
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.  
6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-12. Static DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area (2 of 2)  
Rising  
Falling  
Threshold Threshold  
Sample  
Type  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Default  
Default  
Tx CIR Utilization  
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs  
(1 min)  
None  
Must be  
configured.  
0
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
7.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
Table B-13. Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area  
Rising  
Threshold Threshold  
Default Default  
Falling  
Sample  
Type  
Event  
Type  
2
1
Item  
MIB/Tag/OID  
Interval  
Rx DLCI Link  
Utilization  
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs.  
(1 min)  
Rising  
70% of link 65% of link  
capability capability  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
9.I.D  
Tx DLCI Link  
Utilization  
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB  
(RFC 2115)  
60 secs.  
(1 min)  
Rising  
70% of link 65% of link  
capability capability  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.  
7.I.D  
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained  
in the MIB.  
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.  
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.  
D = DLCI number.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order)  
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event  
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold  
set for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap is sent and/or a log  
entry is made.  
This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing  
the NetScout Custom History screen (shown below), which provides the OID  
instead of the alarm condition.  
See Table B-14 for an RMON history OID cross-reference and Table B-15 for an  
RMON alarm OID cross-reference.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (1 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5.I  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
Link Speed  
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)  
Tag: ifSpeed  
All DLCI + LMI Rx Octets  
All DLCI + LMI Tx Octets  
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.I  
Tag: ifInOctets  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.I  
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)  
Tag: ifOutOctets  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.10.32.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D  
Rx FECNs  
Rx BECNs  
Tx Frames  
Tx Octets  
Rx Frames  
Rx Octets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.12.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.12.2.1.2.P  
Protocol Octets  
(for 11 protocols)  
MIB: RMON II (RFC 2021)  
Tag: protocolDistStatsOctets  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (2 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.5.4.8.1.2.I  
Unavailable Seconds  
Rx Non-octet Aligns  
IP Top Listeners (1–6)  
IP Top Talkers (1–6)  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFreeRunUAS  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.13.1.2.1.4.H.T.N  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.13.1.2.1.6.H.T.N  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devRmonIPTopNDstIP  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devRmonIPTopNSrcIP  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.3.I.D  
DLCI CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciFrCIR  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.7.I .D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.8.I .D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.17.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.18.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.20.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.22.I .D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.37.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.39.I.D  
Tx DEs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxDE  
Tx BECNs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrCircuitTxBECN  
Tx Frames Above CIR  
Rx Frames Above CIR  
Network Frames Lost  
Rx DEs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRxFrOutCIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciNetDropFr  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRxDE  
Network Frames Offered  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFr  
Network Frames Offered  
In CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrInCir  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (3 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4 . . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.41.I.D  
Network Frames Dropped  
In CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropOffFrInCir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.43.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.45.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.55.I .D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.57.I .D  
Network Frames Offered  
Above CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrOutCir  
Network Frames Lost  
Above CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciRmtDropFrOutCir  
Network Frames Offered  
Above CIR Within EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropFrCirToEir  
Network Frames Dropped  
Above CIR Within EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-  
CirToEir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.59.I .D  
Network Frames Offered  
Above EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciOfferedFrOverEir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.61.I .D  
Network Frames Dropped  
Above EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-  
OverEir  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.63.I .D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.8.I.D  
DLCI EIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciEir  
DLCI Inactive Seconds  
Average Latency  
Maximum Latency  
Latency Packet Size  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyMax  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyPacketSz  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (4 of 4)  
1
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.2.I.D.N  
Burst Upper Limit (1–5)  
Burst Octets (1–5)  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtBurstUpLimit  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.3.I.D.N  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtBurstOctets  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.4.I.D.N  
Burst Frames (1–5)  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtBurstFrames  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.2.I  
LMI Unavailable Seconds  
Total Rx CRC Errors  
Total Tx Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs  
Total Rx Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs  
Total LMI Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.2.I.N  
Port Burst Upper Limits 1–4 MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.3.I.N  
Rx Port Burst Octets 1–5  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.4.I.N  
Tx Port Burst Octets 1–5  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets  
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link  
D = DLCI number  
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size  
H = Host control index  
P = Protocol index  
T = The time mask  
See Table B-15 on page B-27 for an RMON alarm OID cross-reference.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-15. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (1 of 2)  
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.18.9.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.18.9.1.5.I  
Unavailable Seconds  
MIB: DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)  
Tag: dsx1TotalUASs  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1. . .  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D  
Rx FECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D  
Rx BECNs  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs  
Frames Sent  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames  
Tx CIR Utilization  
Tx DLCI Link Utilization  
Frames Received  
Rx DLCI Link Utilization  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames  
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)  
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D  
Tx Frames Exceeding CIR  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D  
Frames Dropped by Network MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: frFrExtDlciNetDropFr  
Missing Latency Responses MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs  
Congested Seconds  
DLCI Inactive Seconds  
Average Latency  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsCongestedSecs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
B-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults  
Table B-15. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (2 of 2)  
Object ID (OID)  
Item  
MIB/Tag  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D  
Current Latency  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.2.I.N  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.3.I.N  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.6.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.7.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.11.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.14.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.15.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.18.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.28.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.29.I  
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I  
Frame Size Upper Limits  
1–5  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit  
Frame Size Count 1–5  
Rx Short Frames  
Rx Long Frames  
LMI Sequence Errors  
Tx Discards  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzCount  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkSeqErr  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards  
Rx Discards  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards  
Rx Nonoctet Aligns  
Rx CRC Errors  
Rx Illegal Frames  
Tx Total Errors  
Rx Total Errors  
Rx Overruns  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns  
Tx Underruns  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns  
Total LMI Errors  
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)  
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
B-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors, Cables, and  
Pin Assignments  
C
This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit’s rear panel, and the pin assignments  
for the connectors/interfaces and cables.  
Rear Panel  
The following illustration shows the FrameSaver 9124 rear panel.  
POWER  
COM  
DSXDSNXE-1T MDM DBM  
99-16353  
The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface.  
NOTE:  
In the pin assignment tables of this appendix, if the pin number is not shown,  
it is not being used.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
COM Port Connector  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver 9626 unit’s  
25-position EIA-232C communication port connector.  
Signal  
Direction  
Pin #  
1
Shield (GND)  
—
DCE Transmit Data (TXD)  
DCE Receive Data (RXD)  
DCE Request To Send (RTS)  
DCE Clear To Send (CTS)  
DCE Data Set Ready (DSR)  
Signal Ground (GND)  
From DTE (In)  
To DTE (Out)  
From DTE (In)  
To DTE (Out)  
From DTE (In)  
—
2
3
4
5 *  
6 *  
7
DCE Carrier Detect (CD)  
DCE Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
* Pins 5, 6, and 8 are tied together.  
To DTE (Out)  
From DTE (In)  
8 *  
20  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
LAN Adapter Converter and Cable  
If connecting to a LAN, order a plug-to-modular jack converter and a LAN  
Adapter cable. The following shows the pin assignments for the:  
H
H
DB25 plug-to-8-position modular jack converter between the COM port and  
the 8-conductor LAN Adapter cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-920)  
Custom 8-conductor cable (with modular plugs on both ends) between the  
converter and the LAN Adapter (Feature No. 3100-F2-910)  
Plug-to-Modular  
Jack Converter  
Cable  
Com Port  
8-Position  
Plug to  
Plug to  
(DB25 Plug)  
Modular Jack  
Modular Jack  
LAN Adapter  
Tx Clock 15  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Unused  
Rx Data  
3
7
2
DTR  
Signal Ground  
Tx Data  
Tx Data  
Signal Ground  
Rx Data  
CTS  
DTR 20  
CD  
8
4
RTS  
Frame Ground  
Unused  
Rx Clock 17  
98-16214  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
Standard EIA-232-D Crossover Cable  
A standard crossover cable can be used to connect the COM port to an  
external modem. The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with  
the FrameSaver unit. See page C-5 to configure an external modem.  
Pin 14  
Pin 1  
P1  
Plug  
P2  
Plug  
Pin 14  
Pin 1  
Pin 25  
Pin 13  
Pin 25  
Pin 13  
P1  
Pin  
Pin  
P2  
1
Chassis Ground  
Chassis Ground  
1
2
2
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
DSR  
DSR  
Signal Ground  
CD (RLSD)  
6
7
Signal Ground  
CD (RLSD)  
7
8
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
RXC  
DTR  
RXC 17  
18  
19  
DTR 20  
21  
22  
23  
XTXC  
XTXC 24  
25  
496-15180  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
" Procedure  
To configure an external modem:  
1. Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable. See  
page C-4 for an illustration of the COM Port connection.  
2. Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem.  
3. Enable auto-answer on your modem, and configure it to use the following  
LSD, DSR, CTS, RTS, and DTR control leads.  
See the table below for AT D0 command strings. Use the following command  
string:  
AT &C0 &D2 &S0 &R1 \D0 S0=1  
AT Command String  
To configure the modem to . . .  
Force LSD on.  
&C0  
&D2  
&S0  
&R1  
\D0  
Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR.  
Force DSR on.  
Ignore RTS.  
Force CTS on.  
S0=1  
Automatically answer incoming calls.  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
Port 1 Connector  
The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34-position  
V.35 connector to the DTE.  
34-Pin  
Socket  
Signal  
ITU CT#  
101  
Direction  
—
Shield  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Signal Ground/Common  
Request to Send (RTS)  
Clear to Send (CTS)  
Data Set Ready (DSR)  
102  
—
105  
To DSU (In)  
From DSU (Out)  
From DSU (Out)  
From DSU (Out)  
106  
107  
Receive Line Signal Detector  
(RLSD or LSD)  
109  
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
Local Loopback (LL)  
108/1, /2  
141  
To DSU (In)  
To DSU (In)  
To DSU (In)  
H
L
Transmit Data (TXD)  
103  
P (A)  
S (B)  
Receive Data (RXD)  
104  
113  
115  
114  
142  
From DSU (Out) R (A)  
T (B)  
Transmit Signal Element Timing –  
DTE Source (XTXC or TT)  
To DSU (In)  
U (A)  
W (B)  
Receive Signal Element Timing –  
DCE Source (RXC)  
From DSU (Out) V (A)  
X (B)  
Transmit Signal Element Timing –  
DCE Source (TXC)  
From DSU (Out) Y (A)  
AA (B)  
Test Mode Indicator (TM)  
From DSU (Out) NN  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
C-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
Standard V.35 Straight-through Cable  
A standard V.35 straight-through cable can be used to connect a DTE port to a  
DTE, where a 34-pin plug-type connector is needed for the data port and a  
34-position socket-type connector is needed for the DTE. No special-order cables  
are required.  
Standard V.35 Crossover Cable  
A standard V.35 crossover cable with a 34-pin plug-type connector on each end  
of the cable can be used to connect the FrameSaver unit’s DTE port to another  
DCE.  
The following illustration provides the pin assignments for the V.35 crossover  
cable.  
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
LL  
NN  
LL  
NN  
KK  
KK  
MM  
MM  
P1  
Pin  
P2  
Pin  
TXD A  
TXD B  
RXD A  
RXD B  
TXC A  
P
S
R
T
T
R
S
P
Z
Y
TXC B AA  
Z
AA  
Y
W
U
X
V
A
B
F
C
E
H
L
RXC A  
RXC B  
ETXC A  
ETXC B  
FRM GND  
SIG GND  
RTS  
V
X
U
W
A
B
C
F
CD  
DTR  
DSR  
LL  
H
E
L
98-16165a  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
T1 Network Cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-500)  
Network access is via a 20-foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug-type  
connector on each end. The following table shows pin assignments and the  
purpose of each.  
Function  
Circuit  
Direction  
Pin Number  
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
R1  
T1  
R
From Network  
From Network  
To Network  
To Network  
1
2
4
5
T
Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable (Feature No. 3100-F1-510)  
The T1 line interface cable is used in Canada as an interface between the  
FrameSaver unit’s network connector and the T1 network interface. The following  
shows pin assignments and the purpose of each.  
RJ48C  
Plug  
Unkeyed  
DA15P  
Plug  
Blue  
Blue  
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11 Receive Ring  
3
Receive Tip  
White/Blue  
Orange  
White/Blue  
Orange  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
9
1
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
White/Orange  
White/Orange  
98-16215  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
C-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
DSX-1 Connector  
If your model includes a DSX-1 interface, the following table shows the signals  
and pin assignments for the 8-position modular DSX-1 interface. The DSX-1  
Adapter is required for this interface.  
Function  
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Shield  
Circuit  
Direction  
From DTE  
From DTE  
—
Pin Number  
R1  
T1  
—
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Shield  
To DTE  
To DTE  
—
T
—
DSX-1 Adapter (Feature No. 9008-F1-560)  
The DSX-1 adapter cable is used as an interface between the unit’s DSX-1  
connector and the DTE’s DB15 interface. The following shows pin assignments  
and the purpose of each.  
8-Position  
DB15  
Socket  
Modular Plug  
Unkeyed  
Blue  
Blue  
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Shield  
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
1
4
Receive Ring  
Receive Tip  
Shield  
White/Blue  
Orange  
White/Blue  
Orange  
Transmit Ring  
Transmit Tip  
Shield  
11 Transmit Ring  
3
2
Transmit Tip  
Shield  
White/Orange  
White/Orange  
99-16216a  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments  
This page intentionally left blank.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
C-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Specifications  
D
Table D-1. FrameSaver SLV 9124 Technical Specifications (1 of 2)  
Specification  
Criteria  
Approvals  
FCC Part 15  
FCC Part 68  
Class A digital device  
Refer to the equipment’s label for the  
Registration Number.  
Industry Canada  
Safety  
Refer to the equipment’s label for the  
Certification Number.  
Refer to the equipment’s label for safety information.  
Physical Environment  
Operating temperature  
Storage temperature  
Relative humidity  
32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)  
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)  
5% to 85% (noncondensing)  
Shock and vibration  
Withstands normal shipping and handling  
Power Consumption and  
Dissipation  
7.9 watts, 60 Hz $3, 0.135 A at 120 Vac$12  
Result: 27 Btu per hour  
Physical Dimensions  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
2.9 inches (7.4 cm)  
8.5 inches (21.6 cm)  
12.5 inches (31.8 cm)  
Weight  
2.65 lbs. (1.2 kg)  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Specifications  
Table D-1. FrameSaver SLV 9124 Technical Specifications (2 of 2)  
Specification  
Criteria  
COM Port  
Standard  
Data rates  
25-position (DB25) connector  
EIA-232/ITU, V.24 (ISO 2110)  
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, and 115.2 kbps  
T1 Network Interface  
Data rates  
8-position modular unkeyed USOC RJ48C jack  
Up to 1.536 Mbps  
Services supported  
Physical interface (USA)  
Physical interface (Canada)  
Framing format  
Fractional T1 service, frame relay service  
RJ48C  
CA81A using adapter cable  
D4, ESF  
Coding format  
AMI, B8ZS  
Line Build-Out (LBO)  
ANSI PRM  
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB  
Selectable  
Bit stuffing  
AT&T TR 62411  
DSX-1 Interface (if applicable)  
Physical interface  
8-position modular connector with optional  
8-position modular-to-DB15 adapter: D-Sub 15 socket  
Framing format  
D4, ESF  
Coding format  
AMI, B8ZS  
DTE line equalization  
5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet  
(0 – 196.5 meters)  
Send AIS  
Selectable  
Data Port  
Standard  
Data rates  
34-position V.35 connector  
V.35/ITU (ISO 2593)  
Variations for T1 rates;  
automatically set to the network rate.  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
D-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Equipment List  
E
Equipment  
See page E-2 for cables you can order.  
Model/Feature  
Number  
Description  
FrameSaver SLV Units  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 T1 Remote Site with 64 PVCs  
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 Vac Power Supply, Network Cable,  
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.  
9124-A2-201  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 T1 Japanese Central Site with 120 PVCs  
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 100–240 Vac Power Supply, Network  
Cable, Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.  
9124C  
9124-A2-404-002  
User Manual  
FrameSaver SLV 9124 User’s Guide (Paper Manual)  
Power Supplies  
9124-A2-GB20  
100–240 Vac for 1-Slot Housing  
120 Vac for 1-Slot Housing  
9001-F1-040  
9001-F1-020  
NMS Products  
OpenLane Enterprise  
7805-D1-001  
7805-D1-003  
9180  
OpenLane Workgroup  
NetScout Manager Plus – For UNIX or Windows NT  
NetScout Server – For UNIX or Windows NT  
NetScout WebCast – For UNIX or Windows NT  
9190  
9155  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Equipment List  
Model/Feature  
Number  
Description  
Optional Features  
Wall Mounting Kit for 1-Slot Housing  
Shelf Mounting Kit for 1-Slot Housings  
9001-F1-891  
9001-F1-894  
Cables  
This table lists cables you can order.  
Description  
Part Number  
Feature Number  
RJ48C T1 Network Cable,  
unkeyed RJ48C-to-unkeyed RJ48C/RJ49C  
– 20 feet/6.1 meters  
035-0209-2031  
3100-F1-500  
For use in the U.S.  
T1 Line Interface Cable,  
RJ48C-to-CA81A – 20 feet/6.1 meters  
For use in Canada.  
035-0221-2031  
035-0381-2031  
3100-F1-510  
RJ48C T1 Network Cable,  
unkeyed RJ48C-to-keyed RJ48C/RJ49C –  
20 feet/6.1 meters  
—
For use in Japan.  
Standard EIA-232 Straight-Through Cable  
(D-Sub9-to-DB25 for PC serial port) –  
14 feet/4.3 meters  
035-0313-1431  
035-0315-1431  
3100-F2-550  
3100-F1-910  
COM Port-to-LAN Adapter Cable,  
custom unkeyed 8-pin plug-to-8-pin plug  
modular cable – 14 feet/4.3 meters  
Used for a LAN Adapter (LANA).  
Adapter DB25 plug-to-8-position modular  
002-0069-0031  
3100-F1-920  
receptacle  
Used with the COM Port-to-LAN Adapter  
Cable.  
Standard EIA-232-D Crossover Cable  
(connects COM Port to external device)  
DB25-to-RJ48 – 14 feet/4.3 meters  
035-0336-1431  
035-0386-0031  
9008-F1-550  
9008-F1-560  
DSX-1 Adapter Cable,  
RJ48C-to-DB15 – 1 foot/0.3048 meters  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
E-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
assigning, community names and access levels, 4-9  
AT commands, 3-67  
Numbers  
55 hexadecimal, test pattern, 6-20, 6-21  
At-a-Glance report, 9-6  
authentificationFailure trap, B-7  
Auto-Configuration, 1-2, 2-4  
Active, 5-14  
A
aborting tests, 6-18  
Access  
setting up, 3-10  
availability, LMI and PVC, 1-3  
Dial-In, 3-67  
Name, 3-54  
B
Type, 3-58  
Access Level, 4-10, 4-11  
assigning, 4-9  
back door access when locked out, 6-4  
Back-to-Back  
Port, 3-64  
Mode Active, 5-14  
operation, setting up, 3-16  
Backspace, 2-6  
security, 2-1  
Session, 3-56  
adding, SLV units to network, 9-3  
AIS  
Bc, 3-44  
Be, 3-44  
alarm condition, 6-7  
at DSX-1 or Network, 5-14  
LED, 5-4, 5-5  
Bit Stuffing, 3-25  
blank, field value, 2-9  
branches/menus, 2-4  
bursting, port, 1-3  
linkDown trap, B-9  
Alarm, 6-7  
(Fail), 5-4  
C
adding manually, 8-11  
conditions, 6-2, 6-7  
editing, 8-9  
Call Directories, 3-9  
Call Retry, 3-62  
LED is lit, 6-13  
central clock, 1-3  
CGA, 3-36  
RMON defaults, B-15  
using template, 8-8  
ALM, LED, 5-4, 5-5  
Alternate  
changing  
configuration options, 3-6  
domains and groups, 8-6  
operating mode, 3-16  
software release, 5-40  
Channel Loopback, 6-28  
Character  
Dial-Out Directory, 3-62  
IP Address, 3-68  
software revision, 5-2  
Subnet Mask, 3-68  
Annex A and D, LMI Protocol, 3-40  
ANSI Performance Report Messages, 3-26  
ANSI T1.403 Annex B FT1 Channel Loopback, 6-28  
ARP, inverse, 1-3  
assign  
Length, 3-63  
matching, 2-9  
CIR, statistics, 5-27  
CIR (bps), 3-44  
Circuit Identifier, 3-27  
circuit multiplexed PVCs, 6-21  
DSX-1 timeslots, 3-34  
frame relay timeslots, 3-32  
timeslots and cross connections, 3-32  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
IN-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Clearing  
Control Leads and LEDs, displaying, 5-3  
controlling  
cross connection assignments, 3-32  
Event, LMI, 3-19, 3-41  
existing information, 3-8  
clearing statistics, 5-26  
Clock  
async terminal access, 4-2  
external device access, 4-4  
FTP access, 4-4  
SNMP access, 4-8  
Invert Transmit, 3-28  
setting system, 3-8  
Telnet access, 4-4  
conversation elements, 9-3  
CRC, 5-33  
Source, 3-22, 3-23  
Transmit, 3-28  
creating  
COM port, 3-49, 3-60, 3-67  
connector, C-2  
a login, 4-11  
new PVC connections/management links, 3-6  
user history files, 8-13  
cross connections, 3-32  
crossover EIA-232 cable, C-4  
CTS, control lead, 5-6  
CTS down, 6-7  
set up for trap dial-out, 3-9  
Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits), 3-44  
Committed Information Rate (CIR), 3-44  
Communication, Port, user interface options, 3-63  
Community Name, 3-54  
assigning, 4-9  
CTS down to Port Device, 5-14  
current software revision, 5-2  
Concord Network Health, compatibility, 9-1  
Concord’s Network Health, 1-1  
Configuration  
D
Auto, Active, 5-14  
Data  
displaying and changing options, 3-5  
menu, 3-3  
Delivery Ratio (DDR), 1-2  
Link Control Identifier (DLCI), 3-53  
Port, physical options, 3-28  
port connector pin assignments, C-6  
Rate (Kbps), 3-63  
menu/branch, 2-4  
option areas, 3-4  
option tables, 3-17  
saving options, 3-7  
selection criteria, 2-1  
uploading SLV and packet capture, 5-41  
Data Channel Loopback, 3-26, 6-28  
Date & Time setting, 3-8  
DBM  
tables, 3-4  
upload/download, 1-4  
configuring  
added SLV units/elements, 9-4  
DLCI records manually, 3-43  
frame relay options, 3-40  
NetScout Manager Plus, 8-3  
network interface, 3-24  
SLV options, 3-20  
Health and Status messages, 5-14  
test status messages, 5-17  
DCLB, 6-28  
DDR, 1-2  
DE, Set, 3-52  
System options, 3-17  
the system, 3-3  
Default IP Destination, 3-49  
Delete key, 2-6  
Connectivity  
deleting, a login, 4-12  
Destination, 3-60  
setting up service provider, 3-15  
test, 6-21  
Default IP, 3-49  
Control  
DLCI, 3-47  
keys, 2-6  
EDLCI, 3-47  
lead descriptions, 5-6  
Leads, Ignore, 3-64  
menu/branch, 2-4  
Link, 3-47  
Device  
messages, 5-7  
troubleshooting problems, 6-13  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
IN-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Dial-In Access, 3-67  
Dial-Out  
DTE  
Loopback, 6-26  
Delay Time (Min), 3-62  
Directory, 3-62  
options, 3-9, 3-59  
port connector pin assignments, C-6  
port-initiated loopbacks, 3-29  
DTLB, 6-26  
DTR  
control lead, 5-6  
Trap, 3-61  
Directory, Alternate Dial-Out, 3-62  
disabling, SNMP access, 4-8  
Discard Eligible (DE), 3-52  
Disconnect, Time (Minutes), 3-57, 3-65  
discovering elements/DLCIs, 9-3  
Discovery  
down, 6-8  
down from Port-1 Device, 5-14  
Ignore Control Leads, 3-64  
frame relay (FR), 3-11  
Frame Relay Mode, saving a mode change, 3-13  
displaying  
configuration options, 3-5  
identity information, 5-2  
LEDs and control leads, 5-3  
DLCI, 3-53  
E
EDLCI, 3-53  
Destination, 3-47  
Source, 3-46  
EER  
at Network, 5-15, 6-7  
LED, 5-4, 5-5  
Destination, 3-47  
Down, 5-14, 6-8  
linkDown trap, B-9  
on SLV Timeout, 3-20  
interface status, 5-20  
monitoring user history, 8-16  
Number, 3-43  
Priority, 3-45  
Records, 3-43  
EIA-232C, COM Port connector, C-2  
EIR, statistics, 5-27  
elements/DLCIs, 9-3  
Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI),  
3-46, 3-47, 3-53  
ending a session, 2-3  
Enter (Return) key, 2-6  
entering, system information, 3-8  
Enterprise, Specific Traps, 3-60  
enterprise-specific traps, B-11  
equipment list, E-1  
Source, 3-46  
statistics, 5-29  
status, 5-19  
Traps on Interfaces, 3-61  
Type, 3-43  
domains and groups  
correcting, 8-6  
Error, Event, LMI, 3-18, 3-41  
Errors, frame relay statistics, 5-31, 5-32  
Esc key, 2-6  
verifying, 8-5  
download, 5-39  
ESF Line, statistics, 5-34  
even parity, 3-63  
capability, 1-4  
downloading  
exception points, 9-7  
determining when completed, 5-40  
MIBs and SNMP traps, B-2  
SLV alarms, 8-8  
Excess Burst Size (Bits), 3-44  
Excessive  
Error Rate linkDown trap, B-9  
Error Rate Threshold, 3-27  
External  
software, 5-37  
user history file, 8-13  
DSX-1  
Device, controlling access, 4-4  
Modem  
adapter pin assignments, C-9  
assigning timeslots, 3-34  
connector pin assignments, C-9  
interface LEDs, 5-5  
setting up, 3-30  
(on Com Port) options, 3-67  
Commands, 3-67  
set up for trap dial-out, 3-9  
Transmit Clock, 3-28  
signaling assignments, 3-36  
timeslot assignments, 5-24  
trunk conditioning, 3-36  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
IN-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
F
I
faceplate, 5-3  
Identity, displaying, 5-2  
Ignore Control Leads, 3-64  
Inactivity Timeout, 3-56, 3-65  
Initial Route Destination, 3-60  
installation and setup, Network Health, 9-2  
installing  
FDR, 1-2  
features, 1-2  
field is blank/empty, 2-9  
file transfer, 5-37  
FTP (file transfer protocol), 3-57  
Session, 3-57  
Network Health, 9-2  
Frame Delivery Ratio (FDR), 1-2  
Frame Relay  
user history files, 8-15  
interface, user, 2-1  
assigning timeslots, 3-32  
configuring interface, 3-40  
configuring system, 3-18  
Discovery, 3-11  
Interface Status, Network, 3-30  
Internal, Transmit Clock, 3-28  
Inverse ARP, 1-3  
Invert Transmit Clock, 3-28  
IP  
saving a mode change, 3-13  
DS0s Base Rate, 3-42  
statistics, 5-31  
default destination, 3-49  
node information, 3-48  
Ping test, 6-31  
troubleshooting PVC problems, 6-15  
frames, 3-52  
Validation, NMS, 3-58  
IP Address, 3-51, 3-65, 3-68  
NMS number, 3-58, 3-59  
Node, 3-49  
FT1 Loopback, 6-28  
FTP, 1-4, 5-37  
file transfers, 5-37  
initiating a session, 5-37  
limiting access, 4-4, 4-6  
Login Required, 3-57  
Max Receive Rate (kbps), 3-57  
Session, 4-6  
IP addressing, limiting SNMP access, 4-10  
K
keyboard keys, 2-6  
keys  
function keys, 2-5, 2-7  
keyboard, 2-6  
screen function, 2-5, 2-7  
G
General  
L
LEDs, 5-4  
options, 3-22  
Lamp Test, 5-17, 6-32  
LAN, adapter and cable, C-3  
latency, 1-3  
SNMP management, options, 3-54  
Traps, 3-60  
generating reports, 9-6  
glossary, viii  
LEDs, 6-2, 6-13  
and control leads, displaying, 5-3  
descriptions, 5-4  
grouping elements for reports, 9-5  
network and DSX interface, 5-5  
limiting  
H
async terminal access, 4-2  
FTP access, 4-6  
hardware revision, NAM, 5-2  
HDLC errors, frame relay statistics, 5-33  
Health and Status, 6-2  
messages, 5-14  
SNMP access, 4-8  
through IP addresses, 4-10  
Telnet access, 4-5  
history  
adding files, 8-13  
installing files, 8-15  
monitoring DLCI, 8-16  
hyperlink to more information, highlighted text, x  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
IN-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Line  
Build Out (LBO), 3-24  
logins, 4-1  
Loopback  
Coding Format, 3-24, 3-30  
Equalization, 3-31  
Data Channel, 6-28  
DTE, 6-26  
Framing Format, 3-24, 3-30  
Loopback, 6-23  
FT1, 6-28  
Line, 6-23  
Link  
Payload, 6-24  
Port (DTE) Initiated, 3-29  
PVC, 6-20  
Destination, 3-47  
frame relay statistics, 5-31  
Protocol, 3-66  
Remote, 6-27, 6-29  
Repeater, 6-25  
V.54, 6-28  
Source, 3-46  
Traps, 3-60  
Traps Interfaces, 3-61  
troubleshooting management, 6-5  
TS Management, 3-50  
linkUp and linkDown  
events, 3-60  
LOS  
at DSX-1, 5-15, 6-10  
at Network, 5-15, 6-10  
LED, 5-4, 5-5  
linkDown trap, B-9  
traps, B-8  
Loss of Signal, linkDown trap, B-9  
LLB, 6-23, 6-27, 6-29  
LMI  
M
and PVC availability, 1-3  
Behavior, 3-18  
Main Menu, screen/branch, 2-4  
making input selections, 2-9  
Management  
Clearing Event (N3), 3-19, 3-41  
configuring frame relay and, 3-18  
Down, 5-15, 6-9  
and Communication, options, 3-48  
General SNMP, options, 3-54  
OpenLane 5.0, 1-4  
PVCs, 3-51  
Error Event (N2), 3-18, 3-41  
frame relay statistics, 5-32  
Heartbeat (T1), 3-19, 3-41  
Inbound Heartbeat (T2), 3-19, 3-42  
N4 Measurement Period (T3), 3-19, 3-42  
packet utility, 6-5  
total number dedicated, 1-3  
setting up local, 3-14  
SNMP, 3-54  
troubleshooting link, 3-48, 6-5  
menu  
Parameters, 3-41  
pass-through, 3-18  
branches, 2-4  
Protocol, 3-40  
Configuration, 3-3  
main, 2-4  
Status Enquiry (N1), 3-19, 3-41  
uploading packet capture data, 5-41  
local  
path, 2-5  
selecting from, 2-8  
Menus, A-1  
external DTE loopback, 3-29  
setting up management, 3-14  
locked out, 4-3, 4-11, 6-4  
LOF, LED, 5-5  
messages  
Device, 5-7  
Health and Status, 5-14  
Self-Test Results, 5-13  
system, 2-5  
logging in, 2-2  
logging out, 2-3  
Login  
System and Test Status, 5-13  
Test Status, DBM, 5-17  
MIB  
creating, 4-11  
ID, 4-11  
modifying and deleting, 4-12  
Required, 3-55, 3-64, 4-3, 4-5, 4-6  
access, 4-9  
downloading, B-2  
support, B-2  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
IN-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
minimal remote configuration, 3-8  
Mode  
Network Health, installation and setup, 9-2  
Network Initiated DCLB, 3-26  
NMS  
changing Operating, demos, 3-16  
Test, 5-4  
IP Address, 3-58, 3-59, 4-10  
IP Validation, 3-58, 4-10  
OpenLane management solution, 1-4  
SNMP security, options, 3-58  
Node  
model number, 2-5  
modem  
Health and Status messages, 5-14  
setting up, 3-9  
trap dial-out, 3-9  
IP Address, 3-49  
modifying, a login, 4-12  
Monitor  
Subnet Mask, 3-49  
Node IP, configuration option tables, 3-48  
NSP, 3-18  
DTR, 3-28  
Pattern, 6-21  
Number of  
RTS, 3-29  
Managers, 3-58, 4-10  
Trap Managers, 3-59  
monitoring  
DLCI history data, 8-16  
FrameSaver unit, 5-12  
LEDs and control leads, 5-3  
using NetScout Manager Plus, 8-18  
Multiplexed  
O
odd parity, 3-63  
OID  
(object identification), user history file, 8-13  
cross-reference (numeric order), B-23, B-27  
OK, LED, 5-4, 5-5  
DLCI, 3-46, 3-47, 3-53  
DLCI Type, 3-43  
PVCs, 6-21  
OOF  
at DSX-1 or Network, 5-15, 6-10  
LED, 5-4, 5-5  
N
N1, LMI Status Enquiry, 3-19, 3-41  
N2, LMI Error Event, 3-18, 3-41  
N3, LMI Clearing Event, 3-19, 3-41  
Name, 3-51  
linkDown trap, B-9  
OpenLane, SLM support, 7-1  
OpenLane 5, 1-4  
operating, changing mode for demos, 3-16  
operation, 2-1  
1 or 2 Access, 4-9  
Access, 3-54  
organization of this document, vii  
Out of Frame, 5-4  
Community, 3-54  
navigating the screens, 2-6  
Net Link, Port Use, 3-63  
NetOnly, 3-11  
linkDown trap, B-9  
Out of Sync, message, 6-15, 6-21  
Outbound Management Priority, 3-45  
NetScout  
Manager Plus, NMS support, 1-5  
NMS support, 1-1  
Network  
P
cable pin assignments, C-8  
Com Link Down, 5-15, 6-10  
configuring the interface, 3-24  
DLCI records, options, 3-43  
Health (Concord) reports, 9-1  
Initiated LLB, 3-25  
Initiated PLB, 3-26  
interface LEDS, 5-5  
interface options, 3-24  
latency, 1-3  
packet capture  
uploading data, 5-41  
utility, 6-5  
packets, 3-52  
Parity, 3-63  
Password, 4-11  
patents, A  
pattern  
send/monitor interior, 6-20  
tests, 6-30  
reference time, 1-3  
timeslot assignments, 5-23  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
IN-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Payload Loopback, 6-24  
performance statistics, 5-25, 6-2  
clearing, 5-26  
PVC  
availability, 1-3  
connection status, 5-21  
connections, 3-46  
Performance Wizard, copying directory, 8-2  
physical  
total number, 1-3  
data port options, 3-28  
DSX-1, 3-30  
Loopback, 6-20  
Management, 3-51  
total number dedicated, 1-3  
name, 3-49, 3-50, 3-60  
tests, 6-19  
tests, 6-22  
pin assignments  
COM port, C-2  
to-LAN cables, C-3  
Port-1 V.35 connector, C-6  
T1 line interface cable, C-8  
T1 network cable, C-8  
V.35 crossover cable, C-7  
Ping test, 6-31  
troubleshooting problems, 6-15  
Q
quality of service, 3-45  
Quick Reference, 3-4  
PLB, 6-24  
Port  
R
(DTE) Initiated Loopbacks, 3-29  
Access Level, 3-64, 4-3  
assignment, clearing, 3-39  
bursting, 1-3  
ratios, FDR and DDR, 1-2  
rear panel, C-1  
remote  
loopbacks, 6-27, 6-29  
units, minimal configuration, 3-8  
Repeater Loopback, 6-25  
reports, Network Health, 9-7  
resetting  
communication, options, 3-63  
control leads, 5-6  
LED, 5-5  
Use, 3-63  
PPP, 3-66  
statistics, 5-26  
Primary Clock  
the unit, 6-3  
Failed, 5-16, 6-11  
Source, 3-22  
unit default configuration options, 6-4  
restoring communication with a misconfigured unit, 6-4  
retrieving statistics, 5-41  
Return (Enter) key, 2-6  
revision, software and hardware, 5-2  
RFC 1213 and 1573, B-2  
RFC 1315, B-2  
Primary Destination  
DLCI, 3-47  
EDLCI, 3-47  
Link, 3-47  
Primary Frame Relay Link, 3-52  
Primary Link RIP, 3-53  
printed reports, 9-7  
problem indicators, 6-2  
product-related documents, ix  
Proprietary, RIP, 3-53, 3-66  
Protocol  
RFC 1406, B-2  
RFC 1604, B-2  
RFC 1659, B-2  
RFC 1757, B-2  
RFC 2021, B-2  
right arrow key, 2-6  
address resolution, 1-3  
Link, 3-66  
RIP, 1-3, 3-15, 3-66  
RJ48C, COM Port connector, C-8  
RLB, 6-25  
LMI, 3-40  
Point-to-Point (PPP), 3-66  
Routing Information (RIP), 3-53, 3-66  
Serial Line, IP (SLIP), 3-66  
Simple Network Management (SNMP), 3-54  
RMON  
alarm and event defaults, B-15  
Specific Traps, B-14  
Traps, 3-61  
user history collection, 1-3  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
IN-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
router, setting up to receive RIP, 3-15  
router-independence, 1-3, 3-18  
Routing, Information Protocol (RIP), 3-66  
running reports, 9-6  
setting up  
auto-configuration, 3-10  
external modem, 3-9  
local management, 3-14  
service provider connectivity, 3-15  
SNMP trap managers, 3-58  
so router can receive RIP, 3-15  
SIG, LED, 5-5  
RXD, control lead, 5-6  
S
Sampling, SLV Inband and Interval, 3-20  
saving configuration options, 3-7  
screen  
SLA, 1-2, 1-4  
SLIP, 3-66  
SLM, vii, 1-1  
area, 2-5  
OpenLane, 7-1  
function keys area, 2-5  
how to navigate, 2-6  
scrolling through valid selections, 2-9  
Secondary Clock  
SLV, vii  
(service level verifier), 1-1  
configuring, 3-20  
Delivery Ratio, 3-20  
DLCI Down on Timeout, 3-20  
Packet Size, 3-21  
Failed, 5-16, 6-11  
Source, 3-23  
security, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-6, 4-1  
SNMP NMS, options, 3-58  
selecting  
performance statistics, 5-27  
reports, 1-2  
Sample Interval (secs), 3-20  
Synchronization Role, 3-21  
Timeout, Error Event Threshold, 3-20, 3-21  
SNMP  
a field, 2-9  
from a menu, 2-8  
Self-Test Results messages, 5-13  
Send  
assigning community names/access levels, 4-9  
limiting access, 4-8, 4-10  
Management, 3-54, 4-8  
NMS security, options, 3-58  
Number of Managers, 3-58  
setting up Trap Managers, 3-58  
Traps, 3-59  
All Ones on DSX-1 Failure, 3-31  
and monitor test pattern, 6-30  
Pattern, 6-20  
serial number, NAM, 5-2  
Service, A  
service level  
management, 1-1  
reports, 9-6  
downloading, B-2  
standards, B-6  
verification  
supported, 6-2  
configuring, 3-20  
software  
statistics, 5-27  
changing, 5-40  
verifier (SLV), 1-1  
download, 1-4  
service provider, management, control/connectivity,  
3-15  
downloading, 5-37  
revision, NAM, 5-2  
Source  
Session  
Access Level, 3-56, 4-5, 4-7  
ending, 2-3  
DLCI, 3-46  
EDLCI, 3-46  
starting, 2-2  
Link, 3-46  
Set DE, 3-52  
Spacebar, 2-6  
setting  
Standard_out RIP, 1-3  
standards compliance for SNMP Traps, B-6  
starting  
Date & Time (system clock), 3-8  
date and time, 3-8  
a session, 2-2  
a test, 6-17  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
IN-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
statistics, 1-3, 5-25  
Terminal, Port Use, 3-63  
Test  
elements, 9-3  
selecting performance intervals for display, 5-34  
uploading to an NMS, 5-41  
Status  
menu/branch, 2-4  
Mode, 5-4  
Status messages, DBM, 5-17  
Tests, 1-3  
DLCI, 5-19  
Enquiry, LMI, 3-19, 3-41  
Health and, 5-14  
aborting, 6-18  
available, 6-16  
information, 5-12  
Connectivity, 6-21  
Data Channel Loopback, 6-28  
DTE Loopback, 6-26  
Duration, 3-22  
IP Ping, 6-31  
Lamp, 6-32  
Line Loopback, 6-23  
pattern, 6-30  
Payload Loopback, 6-24  
physical, 6-22  
LED, 5-4  
menu/branch, 2-4  
PVC connection, 5-21, 5-22  
test messages, 5-17  
timeslot assignment, 5-23  
Stop Bits, 3-64  
stopping a test, 6-17  
Subnet, Mask, 3-52, 3-65  
Subnet Mask, 3-68  
PVC, 6-19  
Node, 3-49  
PVC Loopback, 6-20  
Remote Line Loopback, 6-27, 6-29  
Repeater Loopback, 6-25  
Send/Monitor Pattern, 6-20  
starting or stopping, 6-17  
Timeout, 3-22, 6-16  
through PVC connections, total number, 1-3  
throughput, 1-3  
suggestions, user documentation, A  
summary, network report, 9-7  
switching  
between screen areas, 2-8  
to new software, 5-40  
System  
and test status messages, 5-13  
configuring options, 3-17  
displaying information, 5-2  
Frame Relay and LMI, options, 3-18  
General options, 3-22  
messages, 2-5  
time, setting, 3-8  
Timeout  
Inactivity, 3-56, 3-65  
Test, 6-16  
timeslot assignment, status, 5-23  
timeslot assignments  
DSX-1, 5-24  
Name, Contact, and Location, 5-2  
setting the clock (data & time), 3-8  
network, 5-23  
timeslots, 3-32  
T
T1  
trademarks, A  
Training, A  
Canadian line interface cable, C-8  
LMI Heartbeat, 3-19, 3-41  
network cable, C-8  
transferring data, 5-41  
Transmit Clock  
Invert, 3-28  
network interface options, 3-24  
T2, LMI Inbound Heartbeat, 3-19, 3-42  
T3, LMI N4 Measurement Period, 3-19, 3-42  
Tab key, 2-6  
Source, 3-28  
Transmit Timing, 3-25  
Trap  
Dial-Out, 3-61  
Tc, 3-44  
Disconnect, 3-62  
Managers, Number of, 3-59  
TCP, 5-37  
Telnet  
limiting access, 4-4, 4-5  
Session, 4-5  
user interface options, 3-55  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
March 2000  
IN-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Traps  
V
V.35  
authentificationFailure, B-7  
DLCI, 3-61  
connector, C-6  
Enterprise Specific, 3-60, B-11  
General, 3-60  
crossover cable, C-7  
straight-through cable, C-7  
V.54 Loopback, 3-26, 5-17  
V.54 Loopback, 6-28  
Link, 3-60  
Link Interfaces, 3-61  
linkUp and linkDown, B-8  
RMON, 3-61  
Value Out of Range message, 3-43, 3-44  
variable-bindings, B-9, B-14  
VCI, 1-4  
RMON Specific, B-14  
SNMP and dial-out, options, 3-9, 3-59  
standards, B-6  
viewing, packet capture results, 6-6  
virtual path or channel identifier, 1-4  
VPI, 1-4  
supported, 6-2  
warmStart, B-7  
Trend, report, 9-7  
troubleshooting, 6-1  
creating a management link, 3-48  
device problems, 6-13  
frame relay PVC problems, 6-15  
management link, 6-5  
tables, 6-13  
W
warmStart  
events, General Traps, 3-60  
trap, B-7  
Web-site  
access to documentation, ix  
glossary, viii  
TruePut, 1-2  
TS Management Link, 3-48, 3-50  
Access Level, 3-50  
access level, 4-7  
Y
limiting Telnet access, 4-5, 4-7  
TST, LED, 5-4  
Yellow  
Alarm, B-9  
TXD, control lead, 5-6  
Type, Access, 3-58  
Alarm Signal, 5-4, 5-5  
at DSX-1 or Network, 5-17, 6-12  
U
UNI, 1-2, 3-18, 3-19, 3-41, 3-42  
upgrading, system software, 5-39  
upload/download capability, 1-4  
uploading data, 5-41  
user history  
adding files, 8-13  
installing files, 8-15  
monitoring DLCI, 8-16  
statistics gathering, 1-3  
user interface, 2-1  
cannot be accessed, 6-14  
COM port, set up external modem for trap dial-out,  
3-9  
communication port, options, 3-63  
external modem (on Com port), options, 3-67  
resetting/restoring access, 6-4  
Telnet session, 3-55  
user-defined history, 8-13  
March 2000  
9124-A2-LB20-00  
IN-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Krown Manufacturing Amplified Phone KR2812 User Manual
Krown Manufacturing Universal Remote KA1000RR User Manual
Lennox Hearth Indoor Fireplace MPD35PF NE B User Manual
Lenovo Laptop Docking Station 250310U User Manual
Magnavox Cassette Player VCRVR201BMG User Manual
Makita Power Hammer BHR200SH User Manual
Makita Router 3621 User Manual
Mark Of Fitness Home Gym xm 4416 User Manual
Melitta Coffeemaker MES2B User Manual
Meyer Sound Car Stereo System SB 1 User Manual